S71WS128JB0BAIAY2 [CYPRESS]

Memory IC,;
S71WS128JB0BAIAY2
型号: S71WS128JB0BAIAY2
厂家: CYPRESS    CYPRESS
描述:

Memory IC,

文件: 总171页 (文件大小:4450K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
S71WSxxxJ based MCPs  
Stacked Multi-Chip Product (MCP)  
128/64 Megabit (8M/4M x 16-bit) CMOS 1.8 Volt-only,  
Simultaneous Read/Write, Burst Mode Flash Memory  
with CosmoRAM  
ADVANCE  
DATASHEET  
Distinctive Characteristics  
„
„
Packages  
— 8 x 11.6mm, 84 ball FBGA  
MCP Features  
„
Power supply voltage of 1.7 to 1.95V  
— 7 x 9mm, 80-ball FBGA  
Operating Temperature  
— –25°C to +85°C  
„
Speed: 66MHz  
— –40°C to +85°C  
General Description  
The S71WS series is a product line of stacked Multi-Chip Product (MCP) packages  
and consists of:  
„ One or more flash memory die  
„ pSRAM  
The products covered by this document are listed in the table below. For details  
about their specifications, please refer to the individual constituent datasheets for  
further details:  
Flash Memory Density  
256Mb  
128Mb  
64Mb  
64Mb  
32Mb  
16Mb  
S71WS256JC0  
S71WS128JC0  
S71WS128JB0  
S71WS128JA0  
pSRAM  
Density  
S71WS064JB0  
S71WS064JA0  
Publication Number S71WS256/128/064J_CS Revision A Amendment 0 Issue Date October 27, 2004  
Product Selector Guide  
Flash Speed pSRAM Speed  
Availability  
Status  
Device-Model#  
Flash Density pSRAM Density  
(MHz)  
(MHz/ns)  
Supplier  
Package  
S71WS064JA0-2Y  
S71WS064JB0-2Y  
S71WS128JA0-AY  
S71WS128JB0-AY  
S71WS128JC0-AY  
S71WS256JC0-TY  
16Mb  
Cosmo RAM  
Cosmo RAM  
Cosmo RAM  
Cosmo RAM  
Cosmo RAM  
Cosmo RAM  
Advanced  
Advanced  
Preliminary  
Preliminary  
Preliminary  
Advanced  
64Mb  
TLC080  
32Mb  
66  
66/70  
128Mb  
256Mb  
TLA084  
FTA084  
64Mb  
2
S71WSxxxJ based MCPs  
S71WS256/128/064J_CSA0 October 27, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Automatic Sleep Mode ......................................................................................41  
RESET#: Hardware Reset Input .................................................................41  
S71WSxxxJ based MCPs  
Distinctive Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
MCP Features ........................................................................................................ 1  
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Product Selector Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2  
Connection Diagram (CosmoRAM Type-based) . .7  
Special Handling Instructions For FBGA Package ...................................8  
Connection Diagram (CosmoRAM Type-based) . .9  
Special Handling Instructions For FBGA Package ................................. 10  
Lookahead Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
Input/Output Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
TLA084—84-ball Fine-Pitch Ball Grid Array (FBGA)  
Output Disable Mode ...................................................................................42  
Figure 1. Temporary Sector Unprotect Operation ................... 42  
Figure 2. In-System Sector Protection/Sector Unprotection  
Algorithms........................................................................ 43  
Table 7. SecSi™ Sector Addresses ...................................... 44  
SecSi™ Sector Protection Bit ......................................................................45  
Hardware Data Protection .........................................................................45  
Write Protect (WP#) .......................................................................................45  
Low V Write Inhibit .................................................................................46  
CC  
Write Pulse “Glitch” Protection ...............................................................46  
Logical Inhibit ...................................................................................................46  
Power-Up Write Inhibit ...............................................................................46  
Common Flash Memory Interface (CFI) . . . . . . . 47  
Table 8. CFI Query Identification String ................................ 47  
Table 9. System Interface String ......................................... 48  
Table 10. Device Geometry Definition................................... 48  
Table 11. Primary Vendor-Specific Extended Query ................ 49  
Table 12. WS128J Sector Address Table ............................... 50  
Table 13. WS064J Sector Address Table ............................... 58  
8 x 11.6 mm Package ........................................................................................... 16  
FTA084—84-ball Fine-Pitch Ball Grid Array (FBGA)  
8 x 11.6 mm Package ............................................................................................17  
TLC080—80-ball Fine-Pitch Ball Grid Array  
(FBGA) 7 x 9 mm Package ............................................................................... 18  
Command Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64  
Reading Array Data ...........................................................................................64  
Set Configuration Register Command Sequence .....................................64  
Figure 3. Synchronous/Asynchronous State Diagram.............. 65  
Read Mode Setting .........................................................................................65  
Programmable Wait State Configuration ...............................................65  
Table 14. Programmable Wait State Settings ......................... 66  
Standard wait-state Handshaking Option ...............................................66  
Table 15. Wait States for Standard wait-state Handshaking .... 66  
Read Mode Configuration ...........................................................................66  
Table 16. Read Mode Settings ............................................. 67  
Burst Active Clock Edge Configuration .................................................. 67  
RDY Configuration ........................................................................................67  
Table 17. Configuration Register .......................................... 68  
Reset Command .................................................................................................68  
Autoselect Command Sequence ....................................................................68  
Enter SecSi™ Sector/Exit SecSi™ Sector Command Sequence .............69  
Program Command Sequence ........................................................................70  
Unlock Bypass Command Sequence ........................................................70  
Figure 4. Program Operation............................................... 71  
Chip Erase Command Sequence ....................................................................71  
Sector Erase Command Sequence ................................................................72  
Erase Suspend/Erase Resume Commands .................................................. 73  
Figure 5. Erase Operation................................................... 74  
Password Program Command .......................................................................74  
Password Verify Command .............................................................................74  
Password Protection Mode Locking Bit Program Command .............. 75  
Persistent Sector Protection Mode Locking Bit Program Command 75  
SecSi™ Sector Protection Bit Program Command ................................... 75  
PPB Lock Bit Set Command ............................................................................ 75  
DPB Write/Erase/Status Command .............................................................76  
Password Unlock Command ..........................................................................76  
PPB Program Command ..................................................................................76  
All PPB Erase Command .................................................................................. 77  
PPB Status Command ....................................................................................... 77  
PPB Lock Bit Status Command ...................................................................... 77  
Command Definitions .......................................................................................78  
Table 18. Command Definitions .......................................... 78  
Write Operation Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
DQ7: Data# Polling .............................................................................................81  
Figure 6. Data# Polling Algorithm........................................ 82  
S29WS128/064J  
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22  
Product Selector Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24  
Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Block Diagram of Simultaneous  
Operation Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25  
Input/Output Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26  
Device Bus Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27  
Table 1. Device Bus Operations .......................................... 27  
VersatileIO™ (V ) Control .............................................................................27  
IO  
Requirements for Asynchronous Read Operation (Non-Burst) ..........27  
Requirements for Synchronous (Burst) Read Operation ...................... 28  
8-, 16-, and 32-Word Linear Burst with Wrap Around ..................... 29  
Table 2. Burst Address Groups ............................................ 29  
Configuration Register ..................................................................................... 29  
Handshaking ......................................................................................................... 29  
Simultaneous Read/Write Operations with Zero Latency ................... 30  
Writing Commands/Command Sequences ................................................ 30  
Accelerated Program Operation .................................................................. 30  
Autoselect Mode ..................................................................................................31  
Table 3. Autoselect Codes (High Voltage Method) ................. 32  
Sector/Sector Block Protection and Unprotection ..................................32  
Table 4. S29WS128/064J_MCP Boot Sector/Sector Block Addresses  
for Protection/Unprotection ................................................. 32  
Table 5. S29WS064J Boot Sector/Sector Block Addresses for  
Protection/Unprotection ..................................................... 34  
Sector Protection ...........................................................................................36  
Persistent Sector Protection ...........................................................................36  
Persistent Protection Bit (PPB) ..................................................................37  
Persistent Protection Bit Lock (PPB Lock) .............................................37  
Dynamic Protection Bit (DYB) ...................................................................37  
Table 6. Sector Protection Schemes ..................................... 38  
Persistent Sector Protection Mode Locking Bit ........................................39  
Password Protection Mode .............................................................................39  
Password and Password Mode Locking Bit ................................................39  
64-bit Password ..................................................................................................40  
Persistent Protection Bit Lock .......................................................................40  
Standby Mode ......................................................................................................40  
October 27, 2004 S71WS256/128/064J_CSA0  
3
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
DQ6: Toggle Bit I ................................................................................................83  
CosmoRAM  
Figure 7. Toggle Bit Algorithm.............................................. 84  
DQ2: Toggle Bit II .............................................................................................. 84  
Table 19. DQ6 and DQ2 Indications ..................................... 85  
Reading Toggle Bits DQ6/DQ2 ..................................................................... 85  
DQ5: Exceeded Timing Limits ....................................................................... 86  
DQ3: Sector Erase Timer ................................................................................ 86  
Table 20. Write Operation Status ......................................... 87  
Absolute Maximum Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88  
Figure 8. Maximum Negative Overshoot Waveform................. 88  
Figure 9. Maximum Positive Overshoot Waveform .................. 88  
Operating Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
DC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90  
Test Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Figure 10. Test Setup ......................................................... 91  
Table 21. Test Specifications ............................................... 91  
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
Pin Description (32M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117  
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
Asynchronous Operation (Page Mode) .......................................................118  
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
Synchronous Operation (Burst Mode) ........................................................119  
State Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120  
Initial/Standby State ...........................................................................................120  
Figure 38. Initial Standby State Diagram ............................ 120  
Asynchronous Operation State ....................................................................120  
Figure 39. Asynchronous Operation State Diagram............... 120  
Synchronous Operation State ........................................................................121  
Figure 40. Synchronous Operation Diagram ........................ 121  
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
Key to Switching Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Power-up ...............................................................................................................121  
Configuration Register ......................................................................................121  
CR Set Sequence ................................................................................................121  
Power Down .......................................................................................................124  
Burst Read/Write Operation .........................................................................124  
Figure 41. Burst Read Operation........................................ 125  
Figure 42. Burst Write Operation ....................................... 125  
CLK Input Function ..........................................................................................125  
ADV# Input Function .......................................................................................126  
WAIT# Output Function ................................................................................126  
Figure 43. Read Latency Diagram ...................................... 127  
Address Latch by ADV# .................................................................................128  
Burst Length ........................................................................................................128  
Single Write .........................................................................................................128  
Write Control ....................................................................................................129  
Figure 44. Write Controls.................................................. 129  
Burst Read Suspend ..........................................................................................129  
Figure 45. Burst Read Suspend Diagram............................. 130  
Burst Write Suspend ........................................................................................130  
Figure 46. Burst Write Suspend Diagram ............................ 130  
Burst Read Termination ..................................................................................130  
Figure 47. Burst Read Termination Diagram........................ 131  
Burst Write Termination .................................................................................131  
Figure 48. Burst Write Termination Diagram........................ 131  
Absolute Maximum Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
Recommended Operating Conditions (See  
Warning Below) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
Package Pin Capacitance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
DC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
AC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134  
Read Operation .................................................................................................134  
Write Operation ...............................................................................................136  
Synchronous Operation - Clock Input (Burst Mode) ............................137  
Synchronous Operation - Address Latch (Burst Mode) .......................137  
Synchronous Read Operation (Burst Mode) ............................................138  
Synchronous Write Operation (Burst Mode) ..........................................139  
Power Down Parameters ...............................................................................140  
Other Timing Parameters ...............................................................................140  
AC Test Conditions .........................................................................................140  
AC Measurement Output Load Circuit ......................................................141  
Figure 49. Output Load Circuit........................................... 141  
Switching Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Figure 11. Input Waveforms and Measurement Levels............. 91  
AC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92  
V
Power-up ..................................................................................................... 92  
CC  
Figure 12. VCC Power-up Diagram ........................................ 92  
CLK Characterization ....................................................................................... 92  
Figure 13. CLK Characterization ........................................... 92  
AC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93  
Synchronous/Burst Read @ V = 1.8 V ......................................................93  
IO  
Figure 14. CLK Synchronous Burst Mode Read  
(rising active CLK).............................................................. 94  
Figure 15. CLK Synchronous Burst Mode Read  
(Falling Active Clock).......................................................... 94  
Figure 16. Synchronous Burst Mode Read.............................. 95  
Figure 17. 8-word Linear Burst with Wrap Around................... 95  
Figure 18. Linear Burst with RDY Set One Cycle Before Data.... 96  
Asynchronous Mode Read @ V = 1.8 V ..................................................97  
IO  
Figure 19. Asynchronous Mode Read with Latched Addresses... 98  
Figure 20. Asynchronous Mode Read..................................... 98  
Figure 21. Reset Timings..................................................... 99  
Erase/Program Operations @ V = 1.8 V ................................................100  
IO  
Figure 22. Asynchronous Program Operation Timings: AVD#  
Latched Addresses ........................................................... 101  
Figure 23. Asynchronous Program Operation Timings: WE#  
Latched Addresses ........................................................... 102  
Figure 24. Synchronous Program Operation Timings: WE# Latched  
Addresses ....................................................................... 103  
Figure 25. Synchronous Program Operation Timings: CLK Latched  
Addresses ....................................................................... 104  
Figure 26. Chip/Sector Erase Command Sequence................ 105  
Figure 27. Accelerated Unlock Bypass Programming Timing ... 106  
Figure 28. Data# Polling Timings  
(During Embedded Algorithm)............................................ 107  
Figure 29. Toggle Bit Timings (During Embedded Algorithm).. 107  
Figure 30. Synchronous Data Polling  
Timings/Toggle Bit Timings................................................ 108  
Figure 31. DQ2 vs. DQ6.................................................... 108  
Temporary Sector Unprotect .......................................................................109  
Figure 32. Temporary Sector Unprotect Timing Diagram........ 109  
Figure 33. Sector/Sector Block Protect and Unprotect Timing  
Diagram.......................................................................... 110  
Figure 34. Latency with Boundary Crossing.......................... 111  
Figure 35. Latency with Boundary Crossing into Program/Erase  
Bank .............................................................................. 112  
Figure 36. Example of Wait States Insertion ........................ 113  
Figure 37. Back-to-Back Read/Write Cycle Timings............... 114  
Timing Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142  
Figure 50. Asynchronous Read Timing #1-1 (Basic Timing)... 142  
Figure 51. Asynchronous Read Timing #1-2 (Basic Timing)... 142  
4
S71WS256/128/064J_CSA0 October 27, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Figure 52. Asynchronous Read Timing #2  
(OE# & Address Access) ................................................... 143  
Figure 53. Asynchronous Read Timing #3  
Figure 72. Synchronous Read - WAIT# Output Timing (Continuous  
Read)............................................................................. 155  
Figure 73. 64M Synchronous Read Timing #1 (OE# Control). 156  
Figure 74. 64M Synchronous Read Timing #2 (CE1# Control) 157  
Figure 75. 64M Synchronous Read Timing #3 (ADV# Control) 158  
Figure 76. Synchronous Write Timing #1 (WE# Level Control) 159  
Figure 77. Synchronous Write Timing #2 (WE# Single Clock Pulse  
Control) ......................................................................... 160  
Figure 78. Synchronous Write Timing #3 (ADV# Control) ..... 161  
Figure 79. Synchronous Write Timing #4 (WE# Level Control,  
Single Write)................................................................... 162  
Figure 80. 32M Synchronous Read to Write Timing #1(CE1#  
Control) ......................................................................... 163  
Figure 81. 32M Synchronous Read to Write Timing #2(ADV#  
Control) ......................................................................... 164  
Figure 82. 64M Synchronous Read to Write Timing #1(CE1#  
Control) ......................................................................... 165  
Figure 83. 64M Synchronous Read to Write Timing #2(ADV#  
Control) ......................................................................... 166  
Figure 84. Synchronous Write to Read Timing #1  
(LB# / UB# Byte Access) .................................................. 143  
Figure 54. Asynchronous Read Timing #4 (Page Address Access  
after CE1# Control Access)................................................ 144  
Figure 55. Asynchronous Read Timing #5 (Random and Page  
Address Access)............................................................... 144  
Figure 56. Asynchronous Write Timing #1-1 (Basic Timing) ... 145  
Figure 57. Asynchronous Write Timing #1-2 (Basic Timing) ... 145  
Figure 58. Asynchronous Write Timing #2 (WE# Control)...... 146  
Figure 59. Asynchronous Write Timing #3-1 (WE# / LB# / UB#  
Byte Write Control) .......................................................... 146  
Figure 60. Asynchronous Write Timing #3-2 (WE# / LB# / UB#  
Byte Write Control) .......................................................... 147  
Figure 61. Asynchronous Write Timing #3-3 (WE# / LB# / UB#  
Byte Write Control) .......................................................... 147  
Figure 62. Asynchronous Write Timing #3-4 (WE# / LB# / UB#  
Byte Write Control) .......................................................... 148  
Figure 63. Asynchronous Read / Write Timing #1-1  
(CE1# Control)................................................................ 148  
Figure 64. Asynchronous Read / Write Timing #1-2 (CE1# / WE# /  
OE# Control)................................................................... 149  
Figure 65. Asynchronous Read / Write Timing #2 (OE#, WE#  
Control).......................................................................... 149  
Figure 66. Asynchronous Read / Write Timing #3 (OE,# WE#, LB#,  
UB# Control)................................................................... 150  
Figure 67. Clock Input Timing............................................ 150  
Figure 68. Address Latch Timing (Synchronous Mode)........... 151  
Figure 69. 32M Synchronous Read Timing #1 (OE# Control).. 152  
Figure 70. 32M Synchronous Read Timing #2 (CE1# Control) 153  
Figure 71. 32M Synchronous Read Timing #3 (ADV# Control) 154  
(CE1# Control) ............................................................... 167  
Figure 85. Synchronous Write to Read Timing #2  
(ADV# Control)............................................................... 168  
Figure 86. Power-up Timing #1......................................... 169  
Figure 87. Power-up Timing #2........................................ 169  
Figure 88. Power Down Entry and Exit Timing ..................... 169  
Figure 89. Standby Entry Timing after Read or Write............ 170  
Figure 90. Configuration Register Set Timing #1 (Asynchronous  
Operation)...................................................................... 170  
Figure 91. Configuration Register Set Timing #2 (Synchronous  
Operation)...................................................................... 171  
Revision Summary  
October 27, 2004 S71WS256/128/064J_CSA0  
5
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
MCP Block Diagram  
F-VCC  
Flash-only Address  
Shared Address  
V
V
ID  
CC  
DQ15 to DQ0  
CLK  
WP#  
A22  
16  
DQ15 to DQ0  
CLK  
F-WP#  
F-ACC  
(Note 3) F1-CE#  
OE#  
ACC  
CE#  
OE#  
WE#  
Flash 1  
Flash 2  
(Note 4)  
WE#  
F-RST#  
AVD#  
RESET#  
AVD#  
RDY  
RDY  
(Note 3) F2-CE#  
V
SS  
R-V  
CC  
A22  
V
V
CCQ  
CC  
WAIT#  
(Note 5)  
CLK  
16  
R-CE1#  
CE#  
WE#  
OE#  
I/O15 to I/O0  
pSRAM  
R-UB#  
R-LB#  
UB#  
LB#  
V
SSQ  
(Note 1) R-CE2  
(Note 5)  
AVD#  
(Note 2) R-CRE  
Notes:  
1. R-CRE is only present in CellularRAM-compatible pSRAM.  
2. R-CE2 is only present in CosmoRAM-compatible pSRAM.  
3. For 1 Flash = pSRAM, F1-CE# = CE#. For 2 Flash + pSRAM, CE# = F1-CE# and F2-CE# is the chip-enable pin for  
the second Flash.  
4. Only needed for S71WS256JC0, and S70WS256J00.  
5. CLK and AVD# not applicable for 16Mb pSRAM.  
October 27, 2004 S71WS256/128/064J_CSA0  
6
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Connection Diagram (CosmoRAM Type-based)  
84-ball Fine-Pitch Ball Grid Array  
CosmoRAM-based Pinout (Top View, Balls Facing Down)  
A1  
NC  
A10  
NC  
Legend  
Shared  
B2  
B3  
B4  
B5  
B6  
B7  
B8  
B9  
AVD#  
RFU  
CLK  
F2-CE#  
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
C2  
C3  
A7  
C4  
LB#s  
D4  
C5  
ACC  
D5  
C6  
WE#  
D6  
C7  
A8  
C8  
A11  
D9  
C9  
RFU  
D10  
A15  
E9  
WP#  
D2  
1st Flash only  
2nd Flash only  
1st RAM only  
D3  
A6  
D7  
A3  
UB#s RESET#  
CE2s  
E6  
A19  
E7  
A12  
E8  
E2  
A2  
E3  
E4  
A18  
F4  
E5  
RDY  
F5  
A5  
A20  
F6  
A9  
A13  
F8  
A21  
F9  
F2  
F3  
F7  
RFU  
A23  
A1  
A4  
A17  
G4  
A10  
G7  
A14  
G8  
A22  
G9  
G2  
G3  
VSS  
H3  
G5  
RFU  
H5  
G6  
RFU  
H6  
A0  
DQ1  
H4  
DQ6  
H7  
RFU  
H8  
A16  
Reserved for  
Future Use  
H2  
H9  
RFU  
J9  
CE1#f  
J2  
OE#  
J3  
DQ9  
J4  
DQ3  
J5  
DQ4  
J6  
DQ13  
J7  
DQ15  
J8  
CE1#s  
K2  
DQ0  
K3  
DQ10  
K4  
VCCf  
K5  
VCCs  
K6  
DQ12  
K7  
DQ7  
K8  
VSS  
K9  
RFU  
DQ8  
DQ2  
DQ11  
RFU  
DQ5  
DQ14  
RFU  
L5  
L2  
L3  
L4  
L6  
L7  
L8  
L9  
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
VCCf  
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
M1  
NC  
M10  
NC  
Notes:  
1. In MCP’s based on a single S29WSxxxJ (S71WSxxxJ), ball B5 is RFU. In MCP’s based on two S29WSxxxJ  
(S71WS256J), ball B5 is CE#f2 or F2-CE#.  
2. Addresses are shared btween Flash and RAM depending on the density of the pSRAM.  
MCP  
Flash-only Addresses  
Shared Addresses  
A19-A0  
S71WS064JA0  
S71WS064JB0  
S71WS128JA0  
S71WS128JB0  
S71WS128JC0  
S71WS256JC0  
A21-A20  
A21  
A20-A0  
A22-A20  
A22-A21  
A22  
A19-A0  
A19-A0  
A21-A0  
A22  
A21-A0  
7
S71WS256/128/064J_CSA0 October 27, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Special Handling Instructions For FBGA Package  
Special handling is required for Flash Memory products in FBGA packages.  
Flash memory devices in FBGA packages may be damaged if exposed to ultra-  
sonic cleaning methods. The package and/or data integrity may be compromised  
if the package body is exposed to temperatures above 150°C for prolonged peri-  
ods of time.  
October 27, 2004 S71WS256/128/064J_CSA0  
8
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Connection Diagram (CosmoRAM Type-based)  
80-ball Fine-Pitch Ball Grid Array  
CosmoRAM-based Pinout (Top View, Balls Facing Down)  
Legend  
Shared  
A1  
A2  
A3  
A4  
A5  
A6  
A7  
A8  
AVD#  
RFU  
CLK  
F2-CE#  
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
B1  
B2  
A7  
B3  
LB#s  
C3  
B4  
ACC  
C4  
B5  
WE#  
C5  
B6  
A8  
B7  
A11  
C7  
B8  
RFU  
C8  
WP#  
C1  
1st Flash only  
2nd Flash only  
1st RAM only  
C2  
C6  
A3  
A6  
UB#s RESET#  
CE2s  
D5  
A19  
D6  
A12  
D7  
A15  
D8  
D1  
A2  
D2  
A5  
D3  
A18  
E3  
D4  
RDY  
E4  
A20  
E5  
A9  
A13  
E7  
A21  
E8  
E1  
E2  
E6  
RFU  
A23  
A1  
A4  
A17  
F3  
A10  
F6  
A14  
F7  
A22  
F8  
F1  
F2  
F4  
RFU  
G4  
F5  
RFU  
G5  
A0  
VSS  
G2  
OE#  
H2  
DQ1  
G3  
DQ6  
G6  
RFU  
G7  
A16  
Reserved for  
Future Use  
G1  
G8  
RFU  
H8  
CE1#f  
H1  
DQ9  
H3  
DQ3  
H4  
DQ4  
H5  
DQ13  
H6  
DQ15  
H7  
CE1#s  
J1  
DQ0  
J2  
DQ10  
J3  
VCCf  
J4  
VCCs  
J5  
DQ12  
J6  
DQ7  
J7  
VSS  
J8  
RFU  
DQ8  
DQ2  
DQ11  
RFU  
DQ5  
DQ14  
RFU  
K4  
K1  
K2  
K3  
K5  
K6  
K7  
K8  
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
VCCf  
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
Notes:  
1. In MCP’s based on a single S29WSxxxJ (S71WSxxxJ), ball B5 is RFU. In MCP’s based on two S29WSxxxJ  
(S71WS256J), ball B5 is CE#f2 or F2-CE#.  
2. Addresses are shared btween Flash and RAM depending on the density of the pSRAM.  
3. The 80-ball pinout is applicable only to those MCPs with Flash density of 64Mb or 32Mb. For all the other MCPs  
included in this datasheet, please use the 84-ball pinout for design.  
MCP  
Flash-only Addresses  
Shared Addresses  
A19-A0  
S71WS064JA0  
S71WS064JB0  
S71WS128JA0  
S71WS128JB0  
S71WS128JC0  
S71WS256JC0  
A21-A20  
A21  
A20-A0  
A22-A20  
A22-A21  
A22  
A19-A0  
A19-A0  
A21-A0  
A22  
A21-A0  
9
S71WS256/128/064J_CSA0 October 27, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Special Handling Instructions For FBGA Package  
Special handling is required for Flash Memory products in FBGA packages.  
Flash memory devices in FBGA packages may be damaged if exposed to ultra-  
sonic cleaning methods. The package and/or data integrity may be compromised  
if the package body is exposed to temperatures above 150°C for prolonged peri-  
ods of time.  
October 27, 2004 S71WS256/128/064J_CSA0  
10  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Lookahead Connection Diagram  
Legend:  
A9  
A2  
A10  
A1  
DNU  
DNU  
DNU  
Shared  
or DNU  
(Do Not Use)  
DNU  
B9  
B1  
B2  
B10  
DNU  
DNU  
DNU  
DNU  
MirrorBit Data-storage Only  
Flash/Data Shared Only  
C4  
C5  
C6  
C7  
C8  
C9  
C2  
C3  
AVD#  
VSS  
CLK  
F2-CE#  
F-VCC  
F-CLK  
R-OE# F2-OE#  
D2  
D3  
A7  
D6  
D7  
A8  
D8  
D9  
D4  
D5  
F-WP#  
R-LB# WP#/ACC WE#  
E5 E6  
R-UB# F-RST# R1-CE2  
A11  
F3-CE#  
E2  
A3  
E3  
A6  
E7  
E8  
E9  
E4  
1st Flash Only  
Flash Only  
A19  
A12  
A15  
F2  
A2  
F3  
A5  
F4  
F5  
F6  
F7  
A9  
F8  
F9  
A18  
RDY  
A20  
A13  
A21  
G2  
A1  
G3  
A4  
G4  
GG55  
G6  
G7  
G8  
G9  
A17  
R2-CE1  
A23  
A10  
A14  
A22  
1st RAM Only  
2nd RAM Only  
xRAM Shared Only  
H2  
A0  
H3  
H4  
HH55  
H6  
H7  
H8  
H9  
VSS  
DQ1  
R2-VCC R2-CE2  
DQ6  
A24  
A16  
J2  
J3  
J4  
J5  
J6  
J7  
J8  
J2  
DQ9  
DQ3  
DQ4  
DQ13  
DQ15  
DNU  
F1-CE#  
OE#  
K2  
K3  
K4  
KK55  
K6  
K7  
K8  
K9  
DQ12  
VSS  
R1-CE1#  
DQ0  
DQ10  
F-VCC  
R1-VCC  
DQ7  
L2  
L4  
L5  
L6  
L7  
L8  
L9  
L3  
DQ2  
DQ11  
A25  
DQ5  
DQ14 WP#/ACC  
R-VCC  
DQ8  
M2  
M3  
M4  
M5  
M6  
M7  
M8  
M9  
R-CLK  
A27  
A26  
VSS  
F-VCC  
F4-CE# R-VCCQ F-VCCQ  
N9  
N1  
N2  
N10  
DNU  
F-DQS-1  
F-DQS0  
DNU  
P1  
P9  
P2  
P10  
DNU  
DNU  
DNU  
DNU  
Notes:  
1. F1 and F2 denote XIP/Code Flash, while F3 and F4 denote Data/Companion Flash.  
2. In addition to being defined as F2-CE#, Ball C5 can also be assigned as F1-CE2# for code flash that has two chip  
enable signals.  
3. For MCPs requiring 3.0V Vcc and 1.8V Vio, use the 1.8V Look-ahead Pinout in order to accommodate extra AVD,  
MRS and CLK pins for the pSRAM (if needed).  
4. Refer to Application Note on pinout subsets to match the package size offerings.  
5. Ball B5 is shared between Flash RDY and RAM WAIT# signals.  
11  
S71WS256/128/064J_CSA0 October 27, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Input/Output Descriptions  
A22-A0  
DQ15-DQ0  
OE#  
=
=
=
Address inputs  
Data input/output  
Output Enable input. Asynchronous relative to CLK  
for the Burst mode.  
WE#  
VSS  
NC  
=
=
=
=
Write Enable input.  
Ground  
No Connect; not connected internally  
Ready output. Indicates the status of the Burst read  
(shared with WAIT# pin of RAM).  
RDY  
CLK  
=
Clock input. In burst mode, after the initial word is  
output, subsequent active edges of CLK increment  
the internal address counter. Should be at VIL or VIH  
while in asynchronous mode  
AVD#  
=
Address Valid input. Indicates to device that the  
valid address is present on the address inputs.  
Low = for asynchronous mode, indicates valid  
address; for burst mode, causes starting address to  
be latched.  
High = device ignores address inputs  
F-RST#  
F-WP#  
=
=
Hardware reset input. Low = device resets and  
returns to reading array data  
Hardware write protect input. At VIL, disables  
program and erase functions in the four outermost  
sectors. Should be at VIH for all other conditions.  
F-ACC  
=
Accelerated input. At VHH, accelerates  
programming; automatically places device in unlock  
bypass mode. At VIL, disables all program and erase  
functions. Should be at VIH for all other conditions.  
R-CE1#  
F1-CE#  
=
=
Chip-enable input for pSRAM.  
Chip-enable input for Flash 1. Asynchronous relative  
to CLK for Burst Mode.  
R-CRE  
=
Control Register Enable (Only for MCPs with  
CellularRAM pSRAM).  
F-VCC  
R-VCC  
R-UB#  
R-LB#  
F2-CE#  
=
=
=
=
=
Flash 1.8 Volt-only single power supply.  
pSRAM Power Supply.  
Upper Byte Control (pSRAM).  
Lower Byte Control (pSRAM).  
Chip-enable input for Flash 2. Asynchronous relative  
to CLK for burst mode (needed only for  
S71WS256J).  
DNU  
R-CE2  
=
=
Do not use. Reserved for future Spansion products.  
Chip-enable input for pSRAM  
October 27, 2004 S71WS256/128/064J_CSA0  
12  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Ordering Information  
The order number is formed by a valid combinations of the following:  
S71WS 256  
J
C0 BA  
W
A
K
0
PACKING TYPE  
0
2
3
=
=
=
Tray  
7” Tape and Reel  
13” Tape and Reel  
MODEL NUMBER  
CosmoRAM 1, 66MHz  
Y
=
PACKAGE MODIFIER  
A
T
2
=
=
=
8 x 11.6 mm, 1.2 mm height, 84 balls, FBGA (128)  
8 x 11.6 mm, 1.4 mm height, 84 balls, FBGA  
7 x 9 mm, 1.2 mm height, 80 balls, FBGA  
TEMPERATURE RANGE  
W
I
=
=
Wireless (-25  
Industrial (-40  
°
C to +85  
°
C)  
C)  
°C to +85  
°
PACKAGE TYPE  
BA  
BF  
=
=
Very-thin Fine-pitch BGA Lead (Pb)-free compliant package  
Very-thin Fine-pitch BGA Lead (Pb)-free package  
pSRAM DENSITY  
C0  
B0  
A0  
=
=
=
64 Mb pSRAM  
32 Mb pSRAM  
16 Mb pSRAM  
PROCESS TECHNOLOGY  
110 nm, Floating Gate Technology  
J
=
FLASH DENSITY  
256  
128  
064  
=
=
=
256Mb  
128Mb  
64Mb  
PRODUCT FAMILY  
S71WS Multi-chip Product (MCP)  
1.8-volt Simultaneous Read/Write, Burst Mode Flash Memory and pRAM  
S71WS064JB0 Valid Combinations (WS064J Flash + 16Mb pSRAM)  
Base Ordering  
Part Number  
Temperature  
Range  
Package Marking  
Burst Speed  
Material Set  
Supplier  
S71WS064JA0BAW2Y  
S71WS064JA0BAI2Y  
S71WS064JA0BFW2Y  
S71WS064JA0BFI2Y  
71WS064JA0BAW2Y  
71WS064JA0BAI2Y  
71WS064JA0BFW2Y  
71WS064JA0BFI2Y  
-25°C to +85°C  
40°C to +85°C  
-25°C to +85°C  
40°C to +85°C  
Pb-free compliant  
66 MHz  
CosmoRAM  
Pb-free  
Notes:  
Valid Combinations  
1. Type 0 is standard. Specify other options as required.  
2. BGA package marking omits leading “S” and packing type  
designator from ordering part number.  
Valid Combinations list configurations planned to be supported in vol-  
ume for this device. Consult your local sales office to confirm avail-  
ability of specific valid combinations and to check on newly released  
combinations.  
13  
S71WS256/128/064J_CSA0 October 27, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
S71WS064JB0 Valid Combinations (WS064J Flash + 32Mb pSRAM)  
Base Ordering  
Part Number  
Temperature  
Range  
Package Marking  
Burst Speed  
Material Set  
Supplier  
S71WS064JB0BAW2Y  
S71WS064JB0BAI2Y  
S71WS064JB0BFW2Y  
S71WS064JB0BFI2Y  
71WS064JB0BAW2Y  
71WS064JB0BAI2Y  
71WS064JB0BFW2Y  
71WS064JB0BFI2Y  
-25°C to +85°C  
40°C to +85°C  
-25°C to +85°C  
40°C to +85°C  
Pb-free compliant  
66 MHz  
CosmoRAM  
Pb-free  
Notes:  
Valid Combinations  
1. Type 0 is standard. Specify other options as required.  
2. BGA package marking omits leading “S” and packing type  
designator from ordering part number.  
Valid Combinations list configurations planned to be supported in vol-  
ume for this device. Consult your local sales office to confirm avail-  
ability of specific valid combinations and to check on newly released  
combinations.  
S71WS128JB0 Valid Combinations (WS128J Flash + 16Mb pSRAM)  
Base Ordering  
Part Number  
Temperature  
Range  
Package Marking  
Burst Speed  
Material Set  
Supplier  
S71WS128JA0BAWAY  
S71WS128JA0BAIAY  
S71WS128JA0BFWAY  
S71WS128JA0BFIAY  
71WS128JA0BAWAY  
71WS128JA0BAIAY  
71WS128JA0BFWAY  
71WS128JA0BFIAY  
-25°C to +85°C  
-40°C to +85°C  
-25°C to +85°C  
-40°C to +85°C  
Pb-free compliant  
66 MHz  
CosmoRAM  
Pb-free  
Notes:  
Valid Combinations  
1. Type 0 is standard. Specify other options as required.  
2. BGA package marking omits leading “S” and packing type  
designator from ordering part number.  
Valid Combinations list configurations planned to be supported in vol-  
ume for this device. Consult your local sales office to confirm avail-  
ability of specific valid combinations and to check on newly released  
combinations.  
S71WS128JB0 Valid Combinations (WS128J Flash + 32Mb pSRAM)  
Base Ordering  
Part Number  
Temperature  
Range  
Package Marking  
Burst Speed  
Material Set  
Supplier  
S71WS128JB0BAWAY  
S71WS128JB0BAIAY  
S71WS128JB0BFWAY  
S71WS128JB0BFIAY  
71WS128JB0BAWAY  
71WS128JB0BAIAY  
71WS128JB0BFWAY  
71WS128JB0BFIAY  
-25°C to +85°C  
-40°C to +85°C  
-25°C to +85°C  
-40°C to +85°C  
Pb-free compliant  
66 MHz  
CosmoRAM  
Pb-free  
Notes:  
Valid Combinations  
1. Type 0 is standard. Specify other options as required.  
2. BGA package marking omits leading “S” and packing type  
designator from ordering part number.  
Valid Combinations list configurations planned to be supported in vol-  
ume for this device. Consult your local sales office to confirm avail-  
ability of specific valid combinations and to check on newly released  
combinations.  
S71WS128JC0 Valid Combinations (WS128J Flash + 64Mb pSRAM)  
Base Ordering  
Part Number  
Temperature  
Range  
Package Marking  
Burst Speed  
Material Set  
Supplier  
S71WS128JC0BAWAY  
S71WS128JC0BAIAY  
S71WS128JC0BFWAY  
S71WS128JC0BFIAY  
71WS128JC0BAWAY  
71WS128JC0BAIAY  
71WS128JC0BFWAY  
71WS128JC0BFIAY  
-25°C to +85°C  
-40°C to +85°C  
-25°C to +85°C  
-40°C to +85°C  
Pb-free compliant  
66 MHz  
CosmoRAM  
Pb-free  
Notes:  
Valid Combinations  
1. Type 0 is standard. Specify other options as required.  
2. BGA package marking omits leading “S” and packing type  
designator from ordering part number.  
Valid Combinations list configurations planned to be supported in vol-  
ume for this device. Consult your local sales office to confirm avail-  
ability of specific valid combinations and to check on newly released  
combinations.  
October 27, 2004 S71WS256/128/064J_CSA0  
14  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
S71WS256JC0 Valid Combinations (2 x WS128J Flash + 64Mb pSRAM)  
Base Ordering  
Part Number  
Temperature  
Range  
Package Marking  
Burst Speed  
Material Set  
Supplier  
S71WS256JC0BAWTY  
S71WS256JC0BAITY  
S71WS256JC0BFWTY  
S71WS256JC0BFITY  
71WS256JC0BAWTY  
71WS256JC0BAITY  
71WS256JC0BFWTY  
71WS256JC0BFITY  
-25°C to +85°C  
-40°C to +85°C  
-25°C to +85°C  
-40°C to +85°C  
Pb-free compliant  
66 MHz  
CosmoRAM  
Pb-free  
Notes:  
Valid Combinations  
1. Type 0 is standard. Specify other options as required.  
2. BGA package marking omits leading “S” and packing type  
designator from ordering part number.  
Valid Combinations list configurations planned to be supported in vol-  
ume for this device. Consult your local sales office to confirm avail-  
ability of specific valid combinations and to check on newly released  
combinations.  
15  
S71WS256/128/064J_CSA0 October 27, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Physical Dimensions  
TLA084—84-ball Fine-Pitch Ball Grid Array (FBGA) 8 x 11.6 mm Package  
A
D1  
D
eD  
0.15  
(2X)  
C
10  
9
8
SE  
7
7
6
E
B
E1  
5
4
3
2
1
eE  
J
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
M
L K  
INDEX MARK  
10  
PIN A1  
CORNER  
PIN A1  
CORNER  
7
SD  
0.15  
(2X)  
C
TOP VIEW  
BOTTOM VIEW  
0.20  
C
C
A2  
A
0.08  
C
A1  
SIDE VIEW  
6
84X  
b
0.15  
0.08  
M
C
C
A
B
M
NOTES:  
PACKAGE  
JEDEC  
TLA 084  
N/A  
1. DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING METHODS PER  
ASME Y14.5M-1994.  
2. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS.  
D x E  
11.60 mm x 8.00 mm  
PACKAGE  
3. BALL POSITION DESIGNATION PER JESD 95-1, SPP-010.  
SYMBOL  
MIN  
---  
NOM  
---  
MAX  
NOTE  
4.  
e REPRESENTS THE SOLDER BALL GRID PITCH.  
A
A1  
1.20  
---  
PROFILE  
5. SYMBOL "MD" IS THE BALL MATRIX SIZE IN THE "D"  
DIRECTION.  
0.17  
0.81  
---  
BALL HEIGHT  
SYMBOL "ME" IS THE BALL MATRIX SIZE IN THE  
"E" DIRECTION.  
A2  
---  
0.97  
BODY THICKNESS  
BODY SIZE  
D
11.60 BSC.  
8.00 BSC.  
8.80 BSC.  
7.20 BSC.  
12  
n IS THE NUMBER OF POPULTED SOLDER BALL POSITIONS  
FOR MATRIX SIZE MD X ME.  
E
BODY SIZE  
D1  
MATRIX FOOTPRINT  
MATRIX FOOTPRINT  
6
7
DIMENSION "b" IS MEASURED AT THE MAXIMUM BALL  
DIAMETER IN A PLANE PARALLEL TO DATUM C.  
E1  
SD AND SE ARE MEASURED WITH RESPECT TO DATUMS A  
AND B AND DEFINE THE POSITION OF THE CENTER SOLDER  
BALL IN THE OUTER ROW.  
MD  
ME  
n
MATRIX SIZE D DIRECTION  
MATRIX SIZE E DIRECTION  
BALL COUNT  
10  
84  
WHEN THERE IS AN ODD NUMBER OF SOLDER BALLS IN THE  
OUTER ROW SD OR SE = 0.000.  
Ø b  
eE  
0.35  
0.40  
0.45  
BALL DIAMETER  
WHEN THERE IS AN EVEN NUMBER OF SOLDER BALLS IN THE  
OUTER ROW, SD OR SE = e/2  
0.80 BSC.  
0.80 BSC  
0.40 BSC.  
BALL PITCH  
eD  
BALL PITCH  
8. "+" INDICATES THE THEORETICAL CENTER OF DEPOPULATED  
BALLS.  
SD / SE  
SOLDER BALL PLACEMENT  
A2,A3,A4,A5,A6,A7,A8,A9  
B1,B10,C1,C10,D1,D10,  
E1,E10,F1,F10,G1,G10,  
H1,H10,J1,J10,K1,K10,L1,L10,  
M2,M3,M4,M5,M6,M7,M8,M9  
DEPOPULATED SOLDER BALLS  
9. N/A  
10 A1 CORNER TO BE IDENTIFIED BY CHAMFER, LASER OR INK  
MARK, METALLIZED MARK INDENTATION OR OTHER MEANS.  
3372-2 \ 16-038.22a  
October 27, 2004 S71WS256/128/064J_CSA0  
16  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
FTA084—84-ball Fine-Pitch Ball Grid Array (FBGA) 8 x 11.6 mm Package  
A
D1  
D
eD  
0.15  
(2X)  
C
10  
9
8
SE  
7
7
6
E
B
E1  
5
4
3
2
1
eE  
J
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
M
L K  
INDEX MARK  
10  
PIN A1  
CORNER  
PIN A1  
CORNER  
7
SD  
0.15  
(2X)  
C
TOP VIEW  
BOTTOM VIEW  
0.20  
0.08  
C
C
A2  
A
C
A1  
SIDE VIEW  
6
84X  
b
0.15  
M
C
C
A
B
0.08  
M
NOTES:  
PACKAGE  
JEDEC  
FTA 084  
N/A  
1. DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING METHODS PER  
ASME Y14.5M-1994.  
2. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS.  
D x E  
11.60 mm x 8.00 mm  
PACKAGE  
NOTE  
3. BALL POSITION DESIGNATION PER JESD 95-1, SPP-010.  
SYMBOL  
MIN  
---  
NOM  
---  
MAX  
4.  
e REPRESENTS THE SOLDER BALL GRID PITCH.  
A
A1  
1.40  
---  
PROFILE  
5. SYMBOL "MD" IS THE BALL MATRIX SIZE IN THE "D"  
DIRECTION.  
0.17  
1.02  
---  
BALL HEIGHT  
SYMBOL "ME" IS THE BALL MATRIX SIZE IN THE  
"E" DIRECTION.  
A2  
---  
1.17  
BODY THICKNESS  
BODY SIZE  
D
11.60 BSC.  
8.00 BSC.  
8.80 BSC.  
7.20 BSC.  
12  
n IS THE NUMBER OF POPULTED SOLDER BALL POSITIONS  
FOR MATRIX SIZE MD X ME.  
E
BODY SIZE  
D1  
E1  
MATRIX FOOTPRINT  
MATRIX FOOTPRINT  
6
7
DIMENSION "b" IS MEASURED AT THE MAXIMUM BALL  
DIAMETER IN A PLANE PARALLEL TO DATUM C.  
SD AND SE ARE MEASURED WITH RESPECT TO DATUMS A  
AND B AND DEFINE THE POSITION OF THE CENTER SOLDER  
BALL IN THE OUTER ROW.  
MD  
ME  
n
MATRIX SIZE D DIRECTION  
MATRIX SIZE E DIRECTION  
BALL COUNT  
10  
84  
WHEN THERE IS AN ODD NUMBER OF SOLDER BALLS IN THE  
OUTER ROW SD OR SE = 0.000.  
φb  
0.35  
0.40  
0.45  
BALL DIAMETER  
WHEN THERE IS AN EVEN NUMBER OF SOLDER BALLS IN THE  
OUTER ROW, SD OR SE = e/2  
eE  
0.80 BSC.  
0.80 BSC  
0.40 BSC.  
BALL PITCH  
eD  
SD / SE  
BALL PITCH  
8. "+" INDICATES THE THEORETICAL CENTER OF DEPOPULATED  
BALLS.  
SOLDER BALL PLACEMENT  
A2,A3,A4,A5,A6,A7,A8,A9  
B1,B10,C1,C10,D1,D10,E1,E10  
F1,F10,G1,G10,H1,H10  
DEPOPULATED SOLDER BALLS  
9. N/A  
10 A1 CORNER TO BE IDENTIFIED BY CHAMFER, LASER OR INK  
MARK, METALLIZED MARK INDENTATION OR OTHER MEANS.  
J1,J10,K1,K10,L1,L10  
M2,M3,M4,M5,M6,M7,M8,M9  
3388 \ 16-038.21a  
17  
S71WS256/128/064J_CSA0 October 27, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
TLC080—80-ball Fine-Pitch Ball Grid Array (FBGA) 7 x 9 mm Package  
D1  
A
D
eD  
0.15  
(2X)  
C
8
7
SE  
7
6
5
4
3
2
E
B
E1  
eE  
1
K
J
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
INDEX MARK  
10  
PIN A1  
CORNER  
PIN A1  
CORNER  
7
SD  
0.15  
(2X)  
C
TOP VIEW  
BOTTOM VIEW  
0.20  
0.08  
C
A2  
A
C
C
A1  
SIDE VIEW  
6
80X  
b
0.15  
0.08  
M
M
C
C
A
B
NOTES:  
PACKAGE  
JEDEC  
TLC 080  
N/A  
1. DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING METHODS PER  
ASME Y14.5M-1994.  
2. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS.  
D x E  
9.00 mm x 7.00 mm  
PACKAGE  
3. BALL POSITION DESIGNATION PER JESD 95-1, SPP-010.  
SYMBOL  
MIN  
NOM  
---  
MAX  
NOTE  
4.  
e REPRESENTS THE SOLDER BALL GRID PITCH.  
A
A1  
---  
1.20  
---  
PROFILE  
5. SYMBOL "MD" IS THE BALL MATRIX SIZE IN THE "D"  
DIRECTION.  
0.17  
0.81  
---  
BALL HEIGHT  
SYMBOL "ME" IS THE BALL MATRIX SIZE IN THE  
"E" DIRECTION.  
A2  
---  
0.97  
BODY THICKNESS  
BODY SIZE  
D
9.00 BSC.  
7.00 BSC.  
7.20 BSC.  
5.60 BSC.  
10  
n IS THE NUMBER OF POPULTED SOLDER BALL POSITIONS  
FOR MATRIX SIZE MD X ME.  
E
BODY SIZE  
D1  
E1  
MATRIX FOOTPRINT  
MATRIX FOOTPRINT  
6
7
DIMENSION "b" IS MEASURED AT THE MAXIMUM BALL  
DIAMETER IN A PLANE PARALLEL TO DATUM C.  
SD AND SE ARE MEASURED WITH RESPECT TO DATUMS A  
AND B AND DEFINE THE POSITION OF THE CENTER SOLDER  
BALL IN THE OUTER ROW.  
MD  
ME  
n
MATRIX SIZE D DIRECTION  
MATRIX SIZE E DIRECTION  
BALL COUNT  
8
80  
WHEN THERE IS AN ODD NUMBER OF SOLDER BALLS IN THE  
OUTER ROW SD OR SE = 0.000.  
φb  
0.35  
0.40  
0.45  
BALL DIAMETER  
WHEN THERE IS AN EVEN NUMBER OF SOLDER BALLS IN THE  
OUTER ROW, SD OR SE = e/2  
eE  
0.80 BSC.  
0.80 BSC  
0.40 BSC.  
BALL PITCH  
eD  
SD / SE  
BALL PITCH  
8. "+" INDICATES THE THEORETICAL CENTER OF DEPOPULATED  
BALLS.  
SOLDER BALL PLACEMENT  
DEPOPULATED SOLDER BALLS  
9. N/A  
10 A1 CORNER TO BE IDENTIFIED BY CHAMFER, LASER OR INK  
MARK, METALLIZED MARK INDENTATION OR OTHER MEANS.  
3430 \ 16-038.22 \ 10.15.04  
October 27, 2004 S71WS256/128/064J_CSA0  
18  
S29WS128/064J  
Flash Family for Multi-Chip Products (MCP)  
128/64 Megabit (8/4 M x 16-Bit) CMOS 1.8 Volt-only  
Simultaneous Read/Write, Burst Mode Flash Memory  
ADVANCE  
INFORMATION  
Distinctive Characteristics  
— Asynchronous random access times of 45/55 ns (at  
30 pF)  
Power dissipation (typical values, CL = 30 pF)  
— Burst Mode Read: 10 mA @ 80Mhz  
— Simultaneous Operation: 25 mA @ 80Mhz  
— Program/Erase: 15 mA  
Architectural Advantages  
„
Single 1.8 volt read, program and erase (1.65 to  
1.95 volt)  
„
„
„
Manufactured on 0.11 µm process technology  
VersatileIO™ (VIO) Feature  
— Device generates data output voltages and tolerates  
data input voltages as determined by the voltage on  
the VIO pin  
— Standby mode: 0.2 µA  
Hardware Features  
— 1.8V compatible I/O signals (1.65-1.95 V)  
„
„
„
Handshaking feature available  
— Provides host system with minimum possible latency  
by monitoring RDY  
„
„
Simultaneous Read/Write operation  
— Data can be continuously read from one bank while  
executing erase/program functions in other bank  
— Zero latency between read and write operations  
— Four bank architecture: WS128J: 16Mb/48Mb/48Mb/  
16Mb, WS064J: 8Mb/24Mb/24Mb/8Mb  
Hardware reset input (RESET#)  
— Hardware method to reset the device for reading  
array data  
WP# input  
Programable Burst Interface  
— Write protect (WP#) function allows protection of  
four outermost boot sectors, regardless of sector  
protect status  
— 2 Modes of Burst Read Operation  
— Linear Burst: 8, 16, and 32 words with wrap-around  
— Continuous Sequential Burst  
„
Persistent Sector Protection  
— A command sector protection method to lock  
combinations of individual sectors and sector groups  
to prevent program or erase operations within that  
sector  
„
„
SecSi™ (Secured Silicon) Sector region  
— 128 words accessible through a command sequence,  
64words for the Factory SecSi™ Sector and 64words  
for the Customer SecSi™ Sector.  
Sector Architecture  
4 Kword x 16 boot sectors, eight at the top of the address  
range, and eight at the bottom of the address range  
— Sectors can be locked and unlocked in-system at VCC  
level  
„
„
Password Sector Protection  
WS128J: 4 Kword X 16, 32 Kword x 254 sectors  
— A sophisticated sector protection method to lock  
combinations of individual sectors and sector groups  
to prevent program or erase operations within that  
sector using a user-defined 64-bit password  
Bank A: 4 Kword x 8, 32 Kword x 31 sectors  
Bank B: 32 Kword x 96 sectors  
Bank C: 32 Kword x 96 sectors  
ACC input: Acceleration function reduces  
programming time; all sectors locked when ACC =  
VIL  
Bank D: 4 Kword x 8, 32 Kword x 31 sectors  
WS064J: 4 Kword x 16, 32 Kword x 126 sectors.  
Bank A: 4 Kword x 8, 32 Kword x 15 sectors  
„
„
CMOS compatible inputs, CMOS compatible outputs  
Low VCC write inhibit  
Bank B: 32 Kword x 48 sectors  
Bank C: 32 Kword x 48 sectors  
Bank D: 4 Kword x 8, 32 Kword x 15 sectors  
Software Features  
„
„
Cycling Endurance: 100,000 cycles per sector  
typical  
Data retention: 20-years typical  
„
Supports Common Flash Memory Interface (CFI)  
„
Software command set compatible with JEDEC  
42.4 standards  
— Backwards compatible with AMD Am29BDS,  
AMD Am29BDD, AMD Am29BL, andFujitsu MBM29BS  
families  
Performance Characteristics  
„
Read access times at 80/66 MHz  
— Burst access times of 9.1/11.2 ns @ 30 pF at  
industrial temperature range  
— Synchronous latency of 46/56 ns (at 30 pF)  
„
Data# Polling and toggle bits  
— Provides a software method of detecting program  
and erase operation completion  
Publication Number S29WS128_064J_MCP_00 Revision A Amendment 0 Issue Date May 5, 2004  
This document contains information on a product under development at FASL, LLC. The information is intended to help you evaluate this product. Do not design in this  
product without contacting the factory. FASL reserves the right to change or discontinue work on this proposed product without notice.  
„
Erase Suspend/Resume  
„
Unlock Bypass Program command  
— Suspends an erase operation to read data from, or  
program data to, a sector that is not being erased,  
then resumes the erase operation  
— Reduces overall programming time when issuing  
multiple program command sequences  
21  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
General Description  
The S29WS128/064J_MCP/S29WS064J is a 128/64 Mbit, 1.8 Volt-only, simultaneous  
Read/Write, Burst Mode Flash memory device, organized as 8,388,608/4,194,304 words  
of 16 bits each. This device uses a single VCC of 1.65 to 1.95 V to read, program, and  
erase the memory array. A 12.0-volt VHH on ACC may be used for faster program perfor-  
mance if desired. The device can also be programmed in standard EPROM programmers.  
At 80 MHz, the device provides a burst access of 9.1 ns at 30 pF with a latency of 46 ns  
at 30 pF. At 66 MHz, the device provides a burst access of 11.2 ns at 30 pF with a latency  
of 56 ns at 30 pF. The device operates within the industrial temperature range of -40°C to  
+85°C and the wireless temperature range of -25°C to +85°C. The device is offered in  
Various FBGA packages.  
The Simultaneous Read/Write architecture provides simultaneous operation by divid-  
ing the memory space into four banks. The device can improve overall system perfor-  
mance by allowing a host system to program or erase in one bank, then immediately and  
simultaneously read from another bank, with zero latency. This releases the system from  
waiting for the completion of program or erase operations.  
The device is divided as shown in the following table:  
Quantity  
Bank  
128Mb  
64 Mb  
8
Size  
8
4 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
4 Kwords  
A
31  
96  
96  
31  
8
15  
48  
48  
15  
8
B
C
D
The VersatileIO™ (VIO) control allows the host system to set the voltage levels that the  
device generates at its data outputs and the voltages tolerated at its data inputs to the  
same voltage level that is asserted on the VIO pin.  
The device uses Chip Enable (CE#), Write Enable (WE#), Address Valid (AVD#) and Out-  
put Enable (OE#) to control asynchronous read and write operations. For burst opera-  
tions, the device additionally requires Ready (RDY), and Clock (CLK). This  
implementation allows easy interface with minimal glue logic to a wide range of micropro-  
cessors/microcontrollers for high performance read operations.  
The burst read mode feature gives system designers flexibility in the interface to the de-  
vice. The user can preset the burst length and wrap through the same memory space, or  
read the flash array in continuous mode.  
The clock polarity feature provides system designers a choice of active clock edges, either  
rising or falling. The active clock edge initiates burst accesses and determines when data  
will be output.  
The device is entirely command set compatible with the JEDEC 42.4 single-power-  
supply Flash standard. Commands are written to the command register using standard  
microprocessor write timing. Register contents serve as inputs to an internal state-ma-  
chine that controls the erase and programming circuitry. Write cycles also internally latch  
addresses and data needed for the programming and erase operations. Reading data out  
of the device is similar to reading from other Flash or EPROM devices.  
The Erase Suspend/Erase Resume feature enables the user to put erase or program  
on hold for any period of time to read data from, or program data to, any sector that is  
not selected for erasure. True background erase can thus be achieved. If a read is needed  
from the SecSi™ Sector area (One Time Program area) after an erase suspend, then the  
user must use the proper command sequence to enter and exit this region. Program sus-  
pend is also offered.  
The hardware RESET# pin terminates any operation in progress and resets the internal  
state machine to reading array data. The RESET# pin may be tied to the system reset cir-  
cuitry. A system reset would thus also reset the device, enabling the system microproces-  
sor to read boot-up firmware from the Flash memory device.  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
22  
The host system can detect whether a program or erase operation is complete by using  
the device status bit DQ7 (Data# Polling) and DQ6/DQ2 (toggle bits). After a program or  
erase cycle has been completed, the device automatically returns to reading array data.  
The sector erase architecture allows memory sectors to be erased and reprogrammed  
without affecting the data contents of other sectors. The device is fully erased when  
shipped from the factory.  
Hardware data protection measures include a low VCC detector that automatically in-  
hibits write operations during power transitions. The device also offers two types of data  
protection at the sector level. When at VIL, WP# locks the four outermost boot sectors.  
The device offers two power-saving features. When addresses have been stable for a  
specified amount of time, the device enters the automatic sleep mode. The system can  
also place the device into the standby mode. Power consumption is greatly reduced in  
both modes.  
Spansion™ Flash memory products combine years of Flash memory manufacturing expe-  
rience to produce the highest levels of quality, reliability and cost effectiveness. The de-  
vice electrically erases all bits within a sector simultaneously via Fowler-Nordheim  
tunnelling. The data is programmed using hot electron injection.  
23  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
Product Selector Guide  
S29WS128/064J_MCP/S29WS064J  
Synchronous/Burst Asynchronous  
Part  
Number  
2
2
66  
80*  
66  
80*  
Speed Option  
Speed Option  
MHz MHz  
MHz MHz  
Max Latency, ns (tIACC  
Max Burst Access Time, ns (tBACC  
Max OE# Access, ns (tOE  
)
56  
46  
Max Access Time, ns (tACC  
)
55  
55  
45  
45  
V
=
IO  
1.65 –  
1.95 V  
)
11.2  
11.2  
9.1 Max CE# Access, ns (tCE)  
)
9.1 Max OE# Access, ns (tOE  
)
11.2  
9.1  
Block Diagram  
VCC  
VSS  
DQ15DQ0  
VSSIO  
VIO  
RDY  
Buffer  
RDY  
Erase Voltage  
Generator  
Input/Output  
Buffers  
WE#  
RESET#  
WP#  
State  
Control  
ACC  
Command  
Register  
PGM Voltage  
Generator  
Data  
Latch  
Chip Enable  
Output Enable  
Logic  
CE#  
OE#  
Y-Decoder  
Y-Gating  
VCC  
Detector  
Timer  
Cell Matrix  
X-Decoder  
Burst  
State  
Control  
Burst  
Address  
Counter  
AVD#  
CLK  
Amax–A0  
Amax: WS064J (A21), WS128J (A22)  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
24  
Block Diagram of Simultaneous Operation Circuit  
V
CC  
V
V
SS  
IO  
V
SSIO  
Bank A Address  
DQ15–DQ0  
Bank A  
Amax–A0  
X-Decoder  
OE#  
Bank B Address  
DQ15–DQ0  
Bank B  
WP#  
ACC  
X-Decoder  
Amax–A0  
STATE  
CONTROL  
&
COMMAND  
REGISTER  
RESET#  
WE#  
DQ15–DQ0  
Status  
CE#  
AVD#  
RDY  
Control  
Amax–A0  
DQ15–DQ0  
X-Decoder  
Bank C  
DQ15–DQ0  
Bank C Address  
Amax–A0  
Amax–A0  
X-Decoder  
Bank D  
Bank D Address  
DQ15–DQ0  
Amax: WS064J (A21), WS128J (A22)  
25  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
Input/Output Descriptions  
Amax-A0  
DQ15-DQ0  
CE#  
=
=
=
Address inputs  
Data input/output  
Chip Enable input. Asynchronous relative to CLK for  
the Burst mode.  
OE#  
=
Output Enable input. Asynchronous relative to CLK  
for the Burst mode.  
WE#  
VCC  
=
=
Write Enable input.  
Device Power Supply  
(1.65 – 1.95 V).  
VIO  
=
Input & Output Buffer Power Supply  
(1.65 – 1.95 V).  
VSS  
NC  
RDY  
=
=
=
Ground  
No Connect; not connected internally  
Ready output;  
In Synchronous Mode, indicates the status of the  
Burst read.  
Low = data not valid at expected time. High = data  
valid.  
In Asynchronous Mode, indicates the status of the  
internal program and erase function.  
Low = program/erase in progress.  
High Impedance = program/erase completed.  
CLK is not required in asynchronous mode. In burst  
mode, after the initial word is output, subsequent  
active edges of CLK increment the internal address  
counter.  
Address Valid input. Indicates to device that the valid  
address is present on the address inputs (Amax-A0).  
Low = for asynchronous mode, indicates valid  
address; for burst mode, causes starting address to  
be latched.  
CLK  
=
=
AVD#  
High = device ignores address inputs  
Hardware reset input. Low = device resets and  
returns to reading array data  
Hardware write protect input. At VIL, disables  
program and erase functions in the four outermost  
sectors. Should be at VIH for all other conditions.  
At VHH, accelerates programming; automatically  
places device in unlock bypass mode. At VIL, locks all  
sectors. Should be at VIH for all other conditions.  
RESET#  
WP#  
=
=
ACC  
=
Note:  
1. Amax = A22 (WS128J), A21 (WS064J)  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
26  
Device Bus Operations  
This section describes the requirements and use of the device bus operations,  
which are initiated through the internal command register. The command register  
itself does not occupy any addressable memory location. The register is com-  
posed of latches that store the commands, along with the address and data  
information needed to execute the command. The contents of the register serve  
as inputs to the internal state machine. The state machine outputs dictate the  
function of the device. Table 1 lists the device bus operations, the inputs and con-  
trol levels they require, and the resulting output. The following subsections  
describe each of these operations in further detail.  
Table 1. Device Bus Operations  
CLK  
(See  
Operation  
CE#  
OE#  
WE#  
A22–0  
Addr In  
Addr In  
Addr In  
Addr In  
HIGH Z  
HIGH Z  
DQ15–0 RESET# Note) AVD#  
Asynchronous Read - Addresses Latched  
Asynchronous Read - Addresses Steady State  
Asynchronous Write  
L
L
L
L
H
H
L
I/O  
I/O  
H
H
H
H
H
L
X
X
X
L
L
L
H
H
X
X
I/O  
Synchronous Write  
L
L
I/O  
Standby (CE#)  
H
X
X
X
HIGH Z  
HIGH Z  
X
X
X
X
Hardware Reset  
Burst Read Operations  
Load Starting Burst Address  
L
L
X
L
H
H
Addr In  
HIGH Z  
X
H
H
Advance Burst to next address with  
appropriate Data presented on the Data Bus  
Burst  
Data Out  
H
Terminate current Burst read cycle  
H
X
X
X
H
H
HIGH Z  
HIGH Z  
HIGH Z  
HIGH Z  
H
L
X
X
Terminate current Burst read cycle via RESET#  
X
Terminate current Burst read cycle and start  
new Burst read cycle  
L
X
H
HIGH Z  
I/O  
H
Legend: L = Logic 0, H = Logic 1, X = Don’t Care  
Note: Default active edge of CLK is the rising edge.  
VersatileIO™ (VIO) Control  
The VersatileIO (VIO) control allows the host system to set the voltage levels that  
the device generates at its data outputs and the voltages tolerated at its data in-  
puts to the same voltage level that is asserted on the VIO pin.  
Requirements for Asynchronous Read Operation (Non-Burst)  
To read data from the memory array, the system must first assert a valid address  
on Amax–A0(A22-A0 for WS128J and A21-A0 for WS064J), while driving AVD#  
and CE# to VIL. WE# should remain at VIH. The rising edge of AVD# latches the  
address. The data will appear on DQ15–DQ0. Since the memory array is divided  
into four banks, each bank remains enabled for read access until the command  
register contents are altered.  
Address access time (tACC) is equal to the delay from stable addresses to valid  
output data. The chip enable access time (tCE) is the delay from the stable ad-  
27  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
dresses and stable CE# to valid data at the outputs. The output enable access  
time (tOE) is the delay from the falling edge of OE# to valid data at the output.  
The internal state machine is set for reading array data in asynchronous mode  
upon device power-up, or after a hardware reset. This ensures that no spurious  
alteration of the memory content occurs during the power transition.  
Requirements for Synchronous (Burst) Read Operation  
The device is capable of continuous sequential burst operation and linear burst  
operation of a preset length. When the device first powers up, it is enabled for  
asynchronous read operation.  
Prior to entering burst mode, the system should determine how many wait states  
are desired for the initial word (tIACC) of each burst access, what mode of burst  
operation is desired, which edge of the clock will be the active clock edge, and  
how the RDY signal will transition with valid data. The system would then write  
the configuration register command sequence. See “Set Configuration Register  
Command Sequence” section on page 64 and “Command Definitions” section on  
page 64 for further details.  
Once the system has written the “Set Configuration Register” command se-  
quence, the device is enabled for synchronous reads only.  
The initial word is output tIACC after the active edge of the first CLK cycle. Sub-  
sequent words are output tBACC after the active edge of each successive clock  
cycle, which automatically increments the internal address counter. Note that the  
device has a fixed internal address boundary that occurs every 64 words, starting  
at address 00003Fh.  
During the time the device is outputting data at this fixed internal address bound-  
ary (address 00003Fh, 00007Fh, 0000BFh, etc.), a two cycle latency occurs  
before data appears for the next address (address 000040h, 000080h, 0000C0h,  
etc.).  
Additionally, when the device is read from an odd address, 1 wait state is inserted  
when the address pointer crosses the first boundary that occurs every 16 words.  
For instance, if the device is read from 00001Ah (odd), 1 wait state is inserted  
before the data of 000020h is output. This wait states is inserted at only the first  
16 words boundary. Then, if the device is read from the odd address within the  
last 16 words of 64 word boundary (address 000031h, 000033h,..., 00003Eh), a  
three cycle latency occurs before data appears for the next address (address  
000040h).  
The RDY output indicates this condition to the system by pulsing deactive (low).  
See Figure 34, “Latency with Boundary Crossing,on page 111.  
The device will continue to output sequential burst data, wrapping around to ad-  
dress 000000h after it reaches the highest addressable memory location, until  
the system drives CE# high, RESET# low, or AVD# low in conjunction with a new  
address. See Table 1, “Device Bus Operations,on page 27.  
If the host system crosses the bank boundary while reading in burst mode, and  
the device is not programming or erasing, a two-cycle latency will occur as de-  
scribed above in the subsequent bank. If the host system crosses the bank  
boundary while the device is programming or erasing, the device will provide read  
status information. The clock will be ignored. After the host has completed status  
reads, or the device has completed the program or erase operation, the host can  
restart a burst operation using a new address and AVD# pulse.  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
28  
8-, 16-, and 32-Word Linear Burst with Wrap Around  
The remaining three burst read modes are of the linear wrap around design, in  
which a fixed number of words are read from consecutive addresses. In each of  
these modes, the burst addresses read are determined by the group within which  
the starting address falls. The groups are sized according to the number of words  
read in a single burst sequence for a given mode (see Table 2.)  
Table 2. Burst Address Groups  
Mode  
8-word  
16-word  
32-word  
Group Size  
8 words  
Group Address Ranges  
0-7h, 8-Fh, 10-17h,...  
16 words  
32 words  
0-Fh, 10-1Fh, 20-2Fh,...  
00-1Fh, 20-3Fh, 40-5Fh,...  
As an example: if the starting address in the 8-word mode is 39h, the address  
range to be read would be 38-3Fh, and the burst sequence would be 39-3A-3B-  
3C-3D-3E-3F-38h-etc. The burst sequence begins with the starting address writ-  
ten to the device, but wraps back to the first address in the selected group. In a  
similar fashion, the 16-word and 32-word Linear Wrap modes begin their burst  
sequence on the starting address written to the device, and then wrap back to  
the first address in the selected address group. Note that in these three burst  
read modes the address pointer does not cross the boundary that occurs  
every 128 or 64 words; thus, no wait states are inserted (except during  
the initial access).  
The RDY pin indicates when data is valid on the bus.  
Configuration Register  
The device uses a configuration register to set the various burst parameters:  
number of wait states, burst read mode, active clock edge, RDY configuration,  
and synchronous mode active.  
Handshaking  
The device is equipped with a handshaking feature that allows the host system  
to simply monitor the RDY signal from the device to determine when the initial  
word of burst data is ready to be read. The host system should use the program-  
mable wait state configuration to set the number of wait states for optimal burst  
mode operation. The initial word of burst data is indicated by the active edge of  
RDY after OE# goes low.  
For optimal burst mode performance, the host system must set the appropriate  
number of wait states in the flash device depending on clock frequency. See “Set  
Configuration Register Command Sequence” section on page 64 for more  
information.  
29  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
Simultaneous Read/Write Operations with Zero Latency  
This device is capable of reading data from one bank of memory while program-  
ming or erasing in another bank of memory. An erase operation may also be  
suspended to read from or program to another location within the same bank (ex-  
cept the sector being erased). Figure 37, “Back-to-Back Read/Write Cycle  
Timings,on page 114 shows how read and write cycles may be initiated for si-  
multaneous operation with zero latency. Refer to the DC Characteristics table for  
read-while-program and read-while-erase current specifications.  
Writing Commands/Command Sequences  
The device has the capability of performing an asynchronous or synchronous  
write operation. While the device is configured in Asynchronous read mode, it is  
able to perform Asynchronous write operations only. CLK is ignored in the Asyn-  
chronous programming mode. When in the Synchronous read mode  
configuration, the device is able to perform both Asynchronous and Synchronous  
write operations. CLK and WE# address latch is supported in the Synchronous  
programming mode. During a synchronous write operation, to write a command  
or command sequence (which includes programming data to the device and eras-  
ing sectors of memory), the system must drive AVD# and CE# to VIL, and OE#  
to VIH when providing an address to the device, and drive WE# and CE# to VIL,  
and OE# to VIH. when writing commands or data. During an asynchronous write  
operation, the system must drive CE# and WE# to VIL and OE# to VIH when pro-  
viding an address, command, and data. Addresses are latched on the last falling  
edge of WE# or CE#, while data is latched on the 1st rising edge of WE# or CE#.  
The asynchronous and synchronous programing operation is independent of the  
Set Device Read Mode bit in the Configuration Register (see Table 17, “Configu-  
ration Register,” on page 68).  
The device features an Unlock Bypass mode to facilitate faster programming.  
Once the device enters the Unlock Bypass mode, only two write cycles are re-  
quired to program a word, instead of four.  
An erase operation can erase one sector, multiple sectors, or the entire device.  
Table 12, “WS128J Sector Address Table,on page 50 and Table 13, “WS064J  
Sector Address Table,on page 58 indicate the address space that each sector oc-  
cupies. The device address space is divided into four banks. A “bank address” is  
the address bits required to uniquely select a bank. Similarly, a sector address”  
is the address bits required to uniquely select a sector.  
ICC2 in the “DC Characteristics” section on page 90 represents the active current  
specification for the write mode. The AC Characteristics section contains timing  
specification tables and timing diagrams for write operations.  
Accelerated Program Operation  
The device offers accelerated program operations through the ACC function. ACC  
is primarily intended to allow faster manufacturing throughput at the factory.  
If the system asserts VHH on this input, the device automatically enters the afore-  
mentioned Unlock Bypass mode and uses the higher voltage on the input to  
reduce the time required for program operations. The system would use a two-  
cycle program command sequence as required by the Unlock Bypass mode. Re-  
moving VHH from the ACC input returns the device to normal operation. Note that  
sectors must be unlocked prior to raising ACC to VHH. Note that the ACC pin must  
not be at VHH for operations other than accelerated programming, or device dam-  
age may result. In addition, the ACC pin must not be left floating or unconnected;  
inconsistent behavior of the device may result.  
When at VIL, ACC locks all sectors. ACC should be at VIH for all other conditions.  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
30  
Autoselect Mode  
The autoselect mode provides manufacturer and device identification, and sec-  
tor protection verification, through identifier codes output from the internal  
register (which is separate from the memory array) on DQ15–DQ0. This mode is  
primarily intended for programming equipment to automatically match a device  
to be programmed with its corresponding programming algorithm. However, the  
autoselect codes can also be accessed in-system through the command register.  
When using programming equipment, the autoselect mode requires VID on ad-  
dress pin A9. Address pins must be as shown in Table 3, “Autoselect Codes (High  
Voltage Method),on page 32. In addition, when verifying sector protection, the  
sector address must appear on the appropriate highest order address bits (see  
Table 4, “S29WS128/064J_MCP Boot Sector/Sector Block Addresses for Protec-  
tion/Unprotection,on page 32 and Table 5, “S29WS064J Boot Sector/Sector  
Block Addresses for Protection/Unprotection,on page 34). Table 3 shows the  
remaining address bits that are don’t care. When all necessary bits have been  
set as required, the programming equipment may then read the corresponding  
identifier code on DQ15–DQ0. However, the autoselect codes can also be ac-  
cessed in-system through the command register, for instances when the device  
is erased or programmed in a system without access to high voltage on the A9  
pin. The command sequence is illustrated in Table 18, “Command Definitions,”  
on page 78. Note that if a Bank Address (BA) on address bits A22, A21, and A20  
for the WS128J (A21:A19 for the WS064J) is asserted during the third write  
cycle of the autoselect command, the host system can read autoselect data that  
bank and then immediately read array data from the other bank, without exiting  
the autoselect mode.  
To access the autoselect codes in-system, the host system can issue the autose-  
lect command via the command register, as shown in Table 18, “Command  
Definitions,on page 78. This method does not require VID. Autoselect mode  
may only be entered and used when in the asynchronous read mode. Refer to  
the “Autoselect Command Sequence” section on page 68 for more information.  
31  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
Table 3. Autoselect Codes (High Voltage Method)  
Ama  
x
to  
A11  
to  
A5  
to  
WE  
#
DQ15  
to DQ0  
Description  
CE# OE#  
RESET# A12 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0  
Manufacturer ID  
FASL  
:
VID  
VID  
VID  
L
L
L
L
L
L
H
H
H
H
H
H
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
L
L
L
L
L
X
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
H
L
0001h  
227Eh  
Read Cycle 1  
Read Cycle 2  
2218h (WS128J)  
221Eh (WS064J)  
H
H
H
2200h (WS128J)  
2201h (WS064J)  
Read Cycle 3  
H
L
H
L
H
H
H
L
Sector Protection  
Verification  
0001h (protected),  
0000h (unprotected)  
SA  
DQ15 - DQ8 = 0  
DQ7 - Factory Lock Bit  
1 = Locked, 0 = Not Locked  
DQ6 -Customer Lock Bit  
1 = Locked, 0 = Not Locked  
DQ5 = Handshake Bit  
1 = Reserved, 0 = Standard  
Handshake  
VID  
Indicator Bits  
L
L
L
L
H
H
H
H
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
L
X
L
L
L
L
L
H
H
H
L
DQ4 & DQ3 - Boot Code  
DQ2 - DQ0 = 001  
Hardware Sector  
Group Protection  
0001h (protected),  
0000h (unprotected)  
VID  
SA  
X
Legend: L = Logic Low = VIL, H = Logic High = VIH, BA = Bank Address, SA = Sector Address, X = Don’t care.  
Notes:  
1. The autoselect codes may also be accessed in-system via command sequences.  
2. PPB Protection Status is shown on the data bus  
Sector/Sector Block Protection and Unprotection  
The hardware sector protection feature disables both programming and erase op-  
erations in any sector. The hardware sector unprotection feature re-enables both  
program and erase operations in previously protected sectors. Sector protection/  
unprotection can be implemented via two methods.  
(Note: For the following discussion, the term “sector” applies to both sectors and  
sector blocks. A sector block consists of two or more adjacent sectors that are  
protected or unprotected at the same time (see Table 4, “S29WS128/064J_MCP  
Boot Sector/Sector Block Addresses for Protection/Unprotection,on page 32 and  
Table 5, “S29WS064J Boot Sector/Sector Block Addresses for Protection/Unpro-  
tection,on page 34).)  
Table 4. S29WS128/064J_MCP Boot Sector/Sector Block Addresses for Protection/Unprotection  
Sector/  
Sector  
SA0  
SA1  
SA2  
SA3  
SA4  
SA5  
SA6  
SA7  
A22–A12  
Sector Block Size  
00000000000  
00000000001  
00000000010  
00000000011  
00000000100  
00000000101  
00000000110  
00000000111  
4 Kwords  
4 Kwords  
4 Kwords  
4 Kwords  
4 Kwords  
4 Kwords  
4 Kwords  
4 Kwords  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
32  
Sector/  
Sector  
A22–A12  
Sector Block Size  
SA8  
00000001XXX,  
00000010XXX,  
00000011XXX,  
000001XXXXX  
000010XXXXX  
000011XXXXX  
000100XXXXX  
000101XXXXX  
000110XXXXX  
000111XXXXX  
001000XXXXX  
001001XXXXX  
001010XXXXX  
001011XXXXX  
001100XXXXX  
001101XXXXX  
001110XXXXX  
001111XXXXX  
010000XXXXX  
010001XXXXX  
010010XXXXX  
010011XXXXX  
010100XXXXX  
010101XXXXX  
010110XXXXX  
010111XXXXX  
011000XXXXX  
011001XXXXX  
011010XXXXX  
011011XXXXX  
011100XXXXX  
011101XXXXX  
011110XXXXX  
011111XXXXX  
100000XXXXX  
100001XXXXX  
100010XXXXX  
100011XXXXX  
100100XXXXX  
100101XXXXX  
100110XXXXX  
100111XXXXX  
101000XXXXX  
101001XXXXX  
101010XXXXX  
101011XXXXX  
101100XXXXX  
101101XXXXX  
32 Kwords  
SA9  
32 Kwords  
SA10  
32 Kwords  
SA11–SA14  
SA15–SA18  
SA19–SA22  
SA23-SA26  
SA27-SA30  
SA31-SA34  
SA35-SA38  
SA39-SA42  
SA43-SA46  
SA47-SA50  
SA51–SA54  
SA55–SA58  
SA59–SA62  
SA63–SA66  
SA67–SA70  
SA71–SA74  
SA75–SA78  
SA79–SA82  
SA83–SA86  
SA87–SA90  
SA91–SA94  
SA95–SA98  
SA99–SA102  
SA103–SA106  
SA107–SA110  
SA111–SA114  
SA115–SA118  
SA119–SA122  
SA123–SA126  
SA127–SA130  
SA131-SA134  
SA135-SA138  
SA139-SA142  
SA143-SA146  
SA147-SA150  
SA151–SA154  
SA155–SA158  
SA159–SA162  
SA163–SA166  
SA167–SA170  
SA171–SA174  
SA175–SA178  
SA179–SA182  
SA183–SA186  
SA187–SA190  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
33  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
Sector/  
Sector  
SA191–SA194  
SA195–SA198  
SA199–SA202  
SA203–SA206  
SA207–SA210  
SA211–SA214  
SA215–SA218  
SA219–SA222  
SA223–SA226  
SA227–SA230  
SA231–SA234  
SA235–SA238  
SA239–SA242  
SA243–SA246  
SA247–SA250  
SA251–SA254  
SA255–SA258  
SA259  
A22–A12  
Sector Block Size  
101110XXXXX  
101111XXXXX  
110000XXXXX  
110001XXXXX  
110010XXXXX  
110011XXXXX  
110100XXXXX  
110101XXXXX  
110110XXXXX  
110111XXXXX  
111000XXXXX  
111001XXXXX  
111010XXXXX  
111011XXXXX  
111100XXXXX  
111101XXXXX  
111110XXXXX  
11111100XXX  
11111101XXX  
11111110XXX  
11111111000  
11111111001  
11111111010  
11111111011  
11111111100  
11111111101  
11111111110  
11111111111  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
32 Kwords  
SA260  
32 Kwords  
SA261  
32 Kwords  
SA262  
4 Kwords  
SA263  
4 Kwords  
SA264  
4 Kwords  
SA265  
4 Kwords  
SA266  
4 Kwords  
SA267  
4 Kwords  
SA268  
4 Kwords  
SA269  
4 Kwords  
Table 5. S29WS064J Boot Sector/Sector Block Addresses for Protection/Unprotection  
Sector/  
Sector  
SA0  
A21–A12  
0000000000  
0000000001  
0000000010  
0000000011  
0000000100  
0000000101  
0000000110  
0000000111  
0000001XXX  
0000010XXX  
0000011XXX  
00001XXXXX  
00010XXXXX  
00011XXXXX  
00100XXXXX  
00101XXXXX  
Sector Block Size  
4 Kwords  
SA1  
4 Kwords  
SA2  
4 Kwords  
SA3  
4 Kwords  
SA4  
4 Kwords  
SA5  
4 Kwords  
SA6  
4 Kwords  
SA7  
4 Kwords  
SA8  
32 Kwords  
SA9  
32 Kwords  
SA10  
32 Kwords  
SA11–SA14  
SA15–SA18  
SA19–SA22  
SA23-SA26  
SA27-SA30  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
34  
Sector/  
Sector  
SA31-SA34  
SA35-SA38  
SA39-SA42  
SA43-SA46  
SA47-SA50  
SA51–SA54  
SA55–SA58  
SA59–SA62  
SA63–SA66  
SA67–SA70  
SA71–SA74  
SA75–SA78  
SA79–SA82  
SA83–SA86  
SA87–SA90  
SA91–SA94  
SA95–SA98  
SA99–SA102  
SA103–SA106  
SA107–SA110  
SA111–SA114  
SA115–SA118  
SA119–SA122  
SA123–SA126  
SA127–SA130  
SA131  
A21–A12  
Sector Block Size  
00110XXXXX  
00111XXXXX  
01000XXXXX  
01001XXXXX  
01010XXXXX  
01011XXXXX  
01100XXXXX  
01101XXXXX  
01110XXXXX  
01111XXXXX  
10000XXXXX  
10001XXXXX  
10010XXXXX  
10011XXXXX  
10100XXXXX  
10101XXXXX  
10110XXXXX  
10111XXXXX  
11000XXXXX  
11001XXXXX  
11010XXXXX  
11011XXXXX  
11100XXXXX  
11101XXXXX  
11110XXXXX  
1111100XXX  
1111101XXX  
1111110XXX  
1111111000  
1111111001  
1111111010  
1111111011  
1111111100  
1111111101  
1111111110  
1111111111  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
128 (4x32) Kwords  
32 Kwords  
SA132  
32 Kwords  
SA133  
32 Kwords  
SA134  
4 Kwords  
SA135  
4 Kwords  
SA136  
4 Kwords  
SA137  
4 Kwords  
SA138  
4 Kwords  
SA139  
4 Kwords  
SA140  
4 Kwords  
SA141  
4 Kwords  
35  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
Sector Protection  
The device features several levels of sector protection, which can disable both the  
program and erase operations in certain sectors or sector groups:  
Persistent Sector Protection  
A command sector protection method that replaces the old 12 V controlled pro-  
tection method.  
Password Sector Protection  
A highly sophisticated protection method that requires a password before  
changes to certain sectors or sector groups are permitted  
WP# Hardware Protection  
A write protect pin that can prevent program or erase operations in the outer-  
most sectors.  
All parts default to operate in the Persistent Sector Protection mode. The cus-  
tomer must then choose if the Persistent or Password Protection method is most  
desirable. There are two one-time programmable non-volatile bits that define  
which sector protection method will be used. If the customer decides to continue  
using the Persistent Sector Protection method, they must set the Persistent  
Sector Protection Mode Locking Bit. This will permanently set the part to op-  
erate only using Persistent Sector Protection. If the customer decides to use the  
password method, they must set the Password Mode Locking Bit. This will  
permanently set the part to operate only using password sector protection.  
It is important to remember that setting either the Persistent Sector Protec-  
tion Mode Locking Bit or the Password Mode Locking Bit permanently  
selects the protection mode. It is not possible to switch between the two meth-  
ods once a locking bit has been set. It is important that one mode is  
explicitly selected when the device is first programmed, rather than re-  
lying on the default mode alone. This is so that it is not possible for a system  
program or virus to later set the Password Mode Locking Bit, which would cause  
an unexpected shift from the default Persistent Sector Protection Mode into the  
Password Protection Mode.  
The WP# Hardware Protection feature is always available, independent of the  
software managed protection method chosen.  
The device is shipped with all sectors unprotected. Optional Spansionpro-  
gramming services enable programming and protecting sectors at the factory  
prior to shipping the device. Contact your local sales office for Details.  
It is possible to determine whether a sector is protected or unprotected. See  
“Autoselect Command Sequence” section on page 68 for details.  
Persistent Sector Protection  
The Persistent Sector Protection method replaces the old 12 V controlled protec-  
tion method while at the same time enhancing flexibility by providing three  
different sector protection states:  
„
„
Persistently Locked—A sector is protected and cannot be changed.  
Dynamically Locked—The sector is protected and can be changed by a sim-  
ple command  
„
Unlocked—The sector is unprotected and can be changed by a simple com-  
mand  
In order to achieve these states, three types of “bits” are going to be used:  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
36  
Persistent Protection Bit (PPB)  
A single Persistent (non-volatile) Protection Bit is assigned to a maximum of four  
sectors (“S29WS128/064J_MCP Boot Sector/Sector Block Addresses for Protec-  
tion/Unprotection” section on page 32, “S29WS064J Boot Sector/Sector Block  
Addresses for Protection/Unprotection” section on page 34). All 4 Kbyte boot-  
block sectors have individual sector Persistent Protection Bits (PPBs) for greater  
flexibility. Each PPB is individually modifiable through the PPB Program  
Command.  
Note: If a PPB requires erasure, all of the sector PPBs must first be prepro-  
grammed prior to PPB erasing. All PPBs erase in parallel, unlike programming  
where individual PPBs are programmable. It is the responsibility of the user to  
perform the preprogramming operation. Otherwise, an already erased sector  
PPBs has the potential of being over-erased. There is no hardware mechanism to  
prevent sector PPBs over-erasure.  
Persistent Protection Bit Lock (PPB Lock)  
A global volatile bit. When set to “1, the PPBs cannot be changed. When cleared  
(“0”), the PPBs are changeable. There is only one PPB Lock bit per device. The  
PPB Lock is cleared after power-up or hardware reset. There is no command se-  
quence to unlock the PPB Lock.  
Dynamic Protection Bit (DYB)  
A volatile protection bit is assigned for each sector. After power-up or hardware  
reset, the contents of all DYBs is “0. Each DYB is individually modifiable through  
the DPB Write Command.  
When the parts are first shipped, the PPBs are cleared (“0”). The DPBs and PPB  
Lock are defaulted to power up in the cleared state – meaning the PPBs are  
changeable.  
When the device is first powered on, the DYBs power up in the cleared state  
(sectors not protected). The Protection State for each sector is determined by  
the logical OR of the PPB and the DPB related to that sector. For the sectors that  
have the PPBs cleared, the DPBs control whether or not the sector is protected  
or unprotected. By issuing the DPB Write command sequences, the DPBs will be  
set or cleared, thus placing each sector in the protected or unprotected state.  
These are the so-called Dynamic Locked or Unlocked states. They are called  
dynamic states because it is very easy to switch back and forth between the  
protected and unprotected conditions. This allows software to easily protect sec-  
tors against inadvertent changes yet does not prevent the easy removal of  
protection when changes are needed. The DPBs maybe set or cleared as often  
as needed.  
The PPBs allow for a more static, and difficult to change, level of protection. The  
PPBs retain their state across power cycles because they are Non-Volatile. Indi-  
vidual PPBs are set with a command but must all be cleared as a group through  
a complex sequence of program and erasing commands. The PPBs are also lim-  
ited to 100 erase cycles.  
The PBB Lock bit adds an additional level of protection. Once all PPBs are pro-  
grammed to the desired settings, the PPB Lock may be set to “1. Setting the  
PPB Lock disables all program and erase commands to the Non-Volatile PPBs. In  
effect, the PPB Lock Bit locks the PPBs into their current state. The only way to  
clear the PPB Lock is to go through a power cycle. System boot code can deter-  
mine if any changes to the PPB are needed e.g. to allow new system code to be  
downloaded. If no changes are needed then the boot code can set the PPB Lock  
to disable any further changes to the PPBs during system operation.  
37  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
The WP# write protect pin adds a final level of hardware protection to the four  
outermost 4 Kbytes sectors (SA0 - SA3 for a bottom boot, WS128J: SA266 -  
SA269, WS064J: SA138 - SA141, or SA0 - SA3 & WS128J: SA266 - SA269,  
WS064J: SA138 - SA141 for a dual boot). When this pin is low it is not possible  
to change the contents of these four sectors. These sectors generally hold sys-  
tem boot code. So, the WP# pin can prevent any changes to the boot code that  
could override the choices made while setting up sector protection during sys-  
tem initialization.  
It is possible to have sectors that have been persistently locked, and sectors  
that are left in the dynamic state. The sectors in the dynamic state are all un-  
protected. If there is a need to protect some of them, a simple DPB Write  
command sequence is all that is necessary. The DPB write command for the dy-  
namic sectors switch the DPBs to signify protected and unprotected,  
respectively. If there is a need to change the status of the persistently locked  
sectors, a few more steps are required. First, the PPB Lock bit must be disabled  
by either putting the device through a power-cycle, or hardware reset. The PPBs  
can then be changed to reflect the desired settings. Setting the PPB lock bit once  
again will lock the PPBs, and the device operates normally again.  
Note: to achieve the best protection, it’s recommended to execute the PPB lock  
bit set command early in the boot code, and protect the boot code by holding  
WP# = VIL.  
Table 6. Sector Protection Schemes  
DPB  
PPB  
PPB Lock  
Sector State  
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
Unprotected—PPB and DPB are changeable  
Protected—PPB and DPB are changeable  
Protected—PPB and DPB are changeable  
Protected—PPB and DPB are changeable  
Unprotected—PPB not changeable, DPB is  
changeable  
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
Protected—PPB not changeable, DPB is  
changeable  
Protected—PPB not changeable, DPB is  
changeable  
Protected—PPB not changeable, DPB is  
changeable  
Table 6 contains all possible combinations of the DPB, PPB, and PPB lock relating  
to the status of the sector.  
In summary, if the PPB is set, and the PPB lock is set, the sector is protected and  
the protection can not be removed until the next power cycle clears the PPB  
lock. If the PPB is cleared, the sector can be dynamically locked or unlocked. The  
DPB then controls whether or not the sector is protected or unprotected.  
If the user attempts to program or erase a protected sector, the device ignores  
the command and returns to read mode. A program command to a protected  
sector enables status polling for approximately 1 µs before the device returns to  
read mode without having modified the contents of the protected sector. An  
erase command to a protected sector enables status polling for approximately  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
38  
50 µs after which the device returns to read mode without having erased the  
protected sector.  
The programming of the DPB, PPB, and PPB lock for a given sector can be veri-  
fied by writing a DPB/PPB/PPB lock verify command to the device.  
Persistent Sector Protection Mode Locking Bit  
Like the password mode locking bit, a Persistent Sector Protection mode locking  
bit exists to guarantee that the device remain in software sector protection.  
Once set, the Persistent Sector Protection locking bit prevents programming of  
the password protection mode locking bit. This guarantees that a hacker could  
not place the device in password protection mode.  
Password Protection Mode  
The Password Sector Protection Mode method allows an even higher level of se-  
curity than the Persistent Sector Protection Mode. There are two main  
differences between the Persistent Sector Protection and the Password Sector  
Protection Mode:  
„ When the device is first powered on, or comes out of a reset cycle, the PPB  
Lock bit is set to the locked state, rather than cleared to the unlocked state.  
„ The only means to clear the PPB Lock bit is by writing a unique 64-bit Pass-  
word to the device.  
The Password Sector Protection method is otherwise identical to the Persistent  
Sector Protection method.  
A 64-bit password is the only additional tool utilized in this method.  
The password is stored in a the SecSi™ (Secured Silicon) region of the flash  
memory. Once the Password Mode Locking Bit is set, the password is perma-  
nently set with no means to read, program, or erase it. The password is used to  
clear the PPB Lock bit. The Password Unlock command must be written to the  
flash, along with a password. The flash device internally compares the given  
password with the pre-programmed password. If they match, the PPB Lock bit is  
cleared, and the PPBs can be altered. If they do not match, the flash device does  
nothing. There is a built-in 2 µs delay for each “password check.This delay is  
intended to thwart any efforts to run a program that tries all possible combina-  
tions in order to crack the password.  
Password and Password Mode Locking Bit  
In order to select the Password sector protection scheme, the customer must first  
program the password. FASL recommends that the password be somehow corre-  
lated to the unique Electronic Serial Number (ESN) of the particular flash device.  
Each ESN is different for every flash device; therefore each password should be  
different for every flash device. While programming in the password region, the  
customer may perform Password Verify operations.  
Once the desired password is programmed in, the customer must then set the  
Password Mode Locking Bit. This operation achieves two objectives:  
1. It permanently sets the device to operate using the Password Protection  
Mode. It is not possible to reverse this function.  
2. It also disables all further commands to the password region. All program,  
and read operations are ignored.  
Both of these objectives are important, and if not carefully considered, may lead  
to unrecoverable errors. The user must be sure that the Password Protection  
method is desired when setting the Password Mode Locking Bit. More impor-  
tantly, the user must be sure that the password is correct when the Password  
39  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
Mode Locking Bit is set. Due to the fact that read operations are disabled, there  
is no means to verify what the password is afterwards. If the password is lost  
after setting the Password Mode Locking Bit, there will be no way to clear the  
PPB Lock bit.  
The Password Mode Locking Bit, once set, prevents reading the 64-bit password  
on the DQ bus and further password programming. The Password Mode Locking  
Bit is not erasable. Once Password Mode Locking Bit is programmed, the Persis-  
tent Sector Protection Locking Bit is disabled from programming, guaranteeing  
that no changes to the protection scheme are allowed.  
64-bit Password  
The 64-bit Password is located in its own memory space and is accessible  
through the use of the Password Program and Verify commands (see “Password  
Program Command” section on page 74 and “Password Verify Command” sec-  
tion on page 74). The password function works in conjunction with the Password  
Mode Locking Bit, which when set, prevents the Password Verify command from  
reading the contents of the password on the pins of the device.  
Persistent Protection Bit Lock  
The Persistent Protection Bit (PPB) Lock is a volatile bit that reflects the state of  
the Password Mode Locking Bit after power-up reset. If the Password Mode Lock  
Bit is also set, after a hardware reset (RESET# asserted) or a power-up reset  
the ONLY means for clearing the PPB Lock Bit in Password Protection Mode is to  
issue the Password Unlock command. Successful execution of the Password Un-  
lock command clears the PPB Lock Bit, allowing for sector PPBs modifications.  
Asserting RESET#, taking the device through a power-on reset, or issuing the  
PPB Lock Bit Set command sets the PPB Lock Bit to a “1.  
If the Password Mode Locking Bit is not set, including Persistent Protection  
Mode, the PPB Lock Bit is cleared after power-up or hardware reset. The PPB  
Lock Bit is setable by issuing the PPB Lock Bit Set command. Once set the only  
means for clearing the PPB Lock Bit is by issuing a hardware or power-up reset.  
The Password Unlock command is ignored in Persistent Protection Mode.  
High Voltage Sector Protection  
Sector protection and unprotection may also be implemented using programming  
equipment. The procedure requires high voltage (VID) to be placed on the RE-  
SET# pin. Refer to Figure 2, “In-System Sector Protection/Sector Unprotection  
Algorithms,on page 43 for details on this procedure. Note that for sector unpro-  
tect, all unprotected sectors must be first protected prior to the first sector write  
cycle. Once the Password Mode Locking bit or Persistent Protection Locking bit are  
set, the high voltage sector protect/unprotect capability is disabled.  
Standby Mode  
When the system is not reading or writing to the device, it can place the device  
in the standby mode. In this mode, current consumption is greatly reduced, and  
the outputs are placed in the high impedance state, independent of the OE#  
input.  
The device enters the CMOS standby mode when the CE# and RESET# inputs are  
both held at VCC ± 0.2 V. The device requires standard access time (tCE) for read  
access, before it is ready to read data.  
If the device is deselected during erasure or programming, the device draws ac-  
tive current until the operation is completed.  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
40  
ICC3 in the “DC Characteristics” section on page 90 represents the standby cur-  
rent specification.  
Automatic Sleep Mode  
The automatic sleep mode minimizes Flash device energy consumption. While in  
asynchronous mode, the device automatically enables this mode when addresses  
remain stable for tACC + 60 ns. The automatic sleep mode is independent of the  
CE#, WE#, and OE# control signals. Standard address access timings provide  
new data when addresses are changed. While in sleep mode, output data is  
latched and always available to the system. Based on the implementation by  
design, the Auto Power Down feature is disabled in synchronous mode  
and enabled in asynchronous mode. As a result, in synchronous mode,  
the device can be in Auto Power Down Mode only by deselecting the CE#.  
Note that a new burst operation is required to provide new data.  
ICC6 in the “DC Characteristics” section on page 90 represents the automatic  
sleep mode current specification.  
RESET#: Hardware Reset Input  
The RESET# input provides a hardware method of resetting the device to reading  
array data. When RESET# is driven low for at least a period of tRP, the device im-  
mediately terminates any operation in progress, tristates all outputs, resets the  
configuration register, and ignores all read/write commands for the duration of  
the RESET# pulse. The device also resets the internal state machine to reading  
array data. The operation that was interrupted should be reinitiated once the de-  
vice is ready to accept another command sequence, to ensure data integrity.  
Current is reduced for the duration of the RESET# pulse. When RESET# is held  
at VSS ± 0.2 V, the device draws CMOS standby current (ICC4). If RESET# is held  
at VIL but not within VSS ± 0.2 V, the standby current will be greater.  
RESET# may be tied to the system reset circuitry. A system reset would thus also  
reset the Flash memory, enabling the system to read the boot-up firmware from  
the Flash memory.  
If RESET# is asserted during a program or erase operation, the device requires  
a time of tREADY (during Embedded Algorithms) before the device is ready to read  
data again. If RESET# is asserted when a program or erase operation is not ex-  
ecuting, the reset operation is completed within a time of tREADY (not during  
Embedded Algorithms). The system can read data tRH after RESET# returns to  
VIH.  
Refer to the “AC Characteristics” section on page 99 for RESET# parameters and  
to Figure 21, “Reset Timings,on page 99 for the timing diagram.  
41  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
Output Disable Mode  
When the OE# input is at VIH, output from the device is disabled. The outputs are  
placed in the high impedance state.  
START  
RESET# = VID  
(Note 1)  
Perform Erase or  
Program Operations  
RESET# = VIH  
Temporary Sector  
Unprotect Completed  
(Note 2)  
Notes:  
1. All protected sectors unprotected (If WP# = VIL, outermost boot sectors will remain protected).  
2. All previously protected sectors are protected once again.  
Figure 1. Temporary Sector Unprotect Operation  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
42  
START  
START  
Protect all sectors:  
The indicated portion  
of the sector protect  
algorithm must be  
performed for all  
PLSCNT = 1  
PLSCNT = 1  
RESET# = VID  
RESET# = VID  
unprotected sectors  
prior to issuing the  
first sector  
Wait 1 µs  
Wait 1 µs  
unprotect address  
No  
First Write  
Cycle = 60h?  
No  
First Write  
Cycle = 60h?  
Temporary Sector  
Unprotect Mode  
Temporary Sector  
Unprotect Mode  
Yes  
Yes  
Set up sector  
address  
No  
All sectors  
protected?  
Sector Protect:  
Write 60h to sector  
address with  
A6 = 0, A1 = 1,  
A0 = 0  
Yes  
Set up first sector  
address  
Sector Unprotect:  
Wait 150 µs  
Write 60h to sector  
address with  
A7:A0 =  
Verify Sector  
Protect: Write 40h  
to sector address  
with A7:A0 =  
01000010  
Reset  
PLSCNT = 1  
Increment  
PLSCNT  
Wait 1.5 ms  
00000010  
Verify Sector  
Unprotect: Write  
40h to sector  
address with  
A6 = 1, A1 = 1,  
A0 = 0  
Read from  
sector address  
with A6 = 0,  
A1 = 1, A0 = 0  
Increment  
PLSCNT  
No  
No  
PLSCNT  
= 25?  
Read from  
sector address  
with A6 = 1,  
Data = 01h?  
Yes  
A1 = 1, A0 = 0  
No  
Yes  
Set up  
next sector  
address  
Yes  
No  
PLSCNT  
= 1000?  
Protect another  
sector?  
Data = 00h?  
Yes  
Device failed  
No  
Yes  
Remove VID  
from RESET#  
No  
Last sector  
verified?  
Device failed  
Write reset  
command  
Yes  
Remove VID  
Sector Unprotect  
Algorithm  
from RESET#  
Sector Protect  
Algorithm  
Sector Protect  
complete  
Write reset  
command  
Sector Unprotect  
complete  
Figure 2. In-System Sector Protection/Sector Unprotection Algorithms  
43  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
SecSi™ (Secured Silicon) Sector Flash Memory Region  
The SecSi™ (Secured Silicon) Sector feature provides a Flash memory region  
that enables permanent part identification through an Electronic Serial Number  
(ESN). The SecSi™ Sector is 128 words in length and located at addresses  
000000h-000007h. The Factory Indicator Bit (DQ7) is used to indicate whether  
or not the Factory SecSi™ Sector is locked when shipped from the factory. The  
Customer Indicator Bit (DQ6) is used to indicate whether or not the Customer  
SecSi™ Sector is locked when shipped from the factory. These bits are perma-  
nently set at the factory and cannot be changed, in order to prevent cloning of a  
factory locked part. This ensures the security of the ESN and customer code  
once the product is shipped to the field.  
FASL™ offers the device with a 64 word Factory SecSi™ Sector that is locked  
when the part is shipped and a 64 words Customer SecSi™ Sector that is either  
locked or is lockable. The Factory SecSi™ Sector is always protected when  
shipped from the factory, and has the Factory Indicator Bit (DQ7) permanently  
set to a “1. The Customer SecSi™ Sector is shipped unprotected with the Cus-  
tomer Indicator Bit (DQ6) set to “0, allowing customers to utilize that sector in  
any manner they choose. Once the Customer SecSi™ Sector area is protected,  
the Customer Indicator Bit will be permanently set to “1.”  
The system accesses the SecSi™ Sector through a command sequence (see  
“Enter SecSi™ Sector/Exit SecSi™ Sector Command Sequence”). After the sys-  
tem has written the Enter SecSi™ Sector command sequence, it may read the  
SecSi™ Sector by using the addresses normally occupied by the memory array.  
This mode of operation continues until the system issues the Exit SecSi™ Sector  
command sequence, or until power is removed from the device. While SecSi™  
Sector access is enabled, Memory Array read access, program operations, and  
erase operations to all sectors other than SA0 are also available. On power-up,  
or following a hardware reset, the device reverts to sending commands to the  
normal address space.  
Factory Locked: Factor SecSi™ Sector Programmed and Protected At the  
Factory  
In a factory sector locked device, the Factory SecSi™ Sector is protected when  
the device is shipped from the factory whether or not the area was programmed  
at the factory. The Factory SecSi™ Sector cannot be modified in any way. Op-  
tional Spansion™ programming service can preprogram a random ESN, a  
customer-defined code, or any combination of the two. The Factory SecSi™ Sec-  
tor is located at addresses 000000h–00003Fh.  
The device is available preprogrammed with one of the following:  
„ A random, secure ESN only within the Factor SecSi™ Sector  
„ Customer code within the Customer SecSi™ Sector through the Spansion  
programming service  
„ Both a random, secure ESN and customer code through the Spansion pro-  
gramming service.  
Table 7. SecSi™ Sector Addresses  
Sector  
Customer  
Factory  
Sector Size  
64 words  
Address Range  
000040h-00007Fh  
000000h-00003Fh  
64 words  
Customers may opt to have their code programmed by FASL through the Span-  
sion programming service. FASL programs the customer’s code, with or without  
the random ESN. The devices are then shipped from FASL’s factory with the Fac-  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
44  
tory SecSi™ Sector and Customer SecSi™ Sector permanently locked. Contact  
the local sales office for details on using Spansion programming services.  
Customer SecSi™ Sector  
The customer lockable area is shipped unprotected, which allows the customer  
to program and optionally lock the area as appropriate for the application. secu-  
rity feature is not required, the Customer SecSi™ Sector can be treated as an  
additional Flash memory space. The Customer SecSi™ Sector can be read any  
number of times, but can be programmed and locked only once. Note that the  
accelerated programming (ACC) and unlock bypass functions are not available  
when programming the Customer SecSi™ Sector, but reading in Banks A, B, and  
C is available. The Customer SecSi™ Sector is located at addresses 000040h–  
00007Fh.  
The Customer SecSi™ Sector area can be protected using one of the following  
procedures:  
„ Write the three-cycle Enter SecSi™ Sector Region command sequence, and  
then follow the in-system sector protect algorithm as shown in Figure 2, “In-  
System Sector Protection/Sector Unprotection Algorithms,on page 43 ex-  
cept that RESET# may be at either VIH or VID. This allows in-system protec-  
tion of the Customer SecSi™ Sector Region without raising any device pin to  
a high voltage. Note that this method is only applicable to the SecSi™ Sector.  
„ Write the SecSi™ Sector Protection Bit Lock command sequence.  
Once the Customer SecSi™ Sector is locked and verified, the system must write  
the Exit SecSi™ Sector Region command sequence to return to reading and  
writing the remainder of the array.  
The Customer SecSi™ Sector lock must be used with caution since, once locked,  
there is no procedure available for unlocking the Customer SecSi™ Sector area  
and none of the bits in the Customer SecSi™ Sector memory space can be mod-  
ified in any way.  
SecSi™ Sector Protection Bit  
The Customer SecSi™ Sector Protection Bit prevents programming of the Cus-  
tomer SecSi™ Sector memory area. Once set, the Customer SecSi™ Sector  
memory area contents are non-modifiable.  
Hardware Data Protection  
The command sequence requirement of unlock cycles for programming or erasing  
provides data protection against inadvertent writes (refer to Table 18, “Command  
Definitions,on page 78 for command definitions).  
The device offers two types of data protection at the sector level:  
„ The PPB and DPB associated command sequences disables or re-enables both  
program and erase operations in any sector or sector group.  
„ When WP# is at VIL, the four outermost sectors are locked.  
„ When ACC is at VIL, all sectors are locked.  
The following hardware data protection measures prevent accidental erasure or  
programming, which might otherwise be caused by spurious system level signals  
during VCC power-up and power-down transitions, or from system noise.  
Write Protect (WP#)  
The Write Protect feature provides a hardware method of protecting the four  
outermost sectors. This function is provided by the WP# pin and overrides the  
previously discussed Sector Protection/Unprotection method.  
45  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
If the system asserts VIL on the WP# pin, the device disables program and erase  
functions in the four “outermost” 4 Kword boot sectors. The four outermost 4  
Kword boot sectors are the four sectors containing the lowest addresses (SA0 -  
SA3), or the four sectors containing the highest addresses (WS128J: SA266 -  
SA269, WS064J: SA138 - SA141) or both the lower four (SA0 - SA3) and upper  
four sectors (WS128J: SA266 - SA269, WS064J: SA138 - SA141) in a dual-boot-  
configured device.  
If the system asserts VIH on the WP# pin, the device reverts to whether the  
upper and/or lower four sectors were last set to be protected or unprotected.  
That is, sector protection or unprotection for these sectors depends on whether  
they were last protected or unprotected using the method described in “PPB Pro-  
gram Command” section on page 76.  
Note that the WP# pin must not be left floating or unconnected; inconsistent be-  
havior of the device may result.  
Low V  
Write Inhibit  
CC  
When VCC is less than VLKO, the device does not accept any write cycles. This pro-  
tects data during VCC power-up and power-down. The command register and all  
internal program/erase circuits are disabled, and the device resets to reading  
array data. Subsequent writes are ignored until VCC is greater than VLKO. The sys-  
tem must provide the proper signals to the control inputs to prevent unintentional  
writes when VCC is greater than VLKO  
.
Write Pulse “Glitch” Protection  
Noise pulses of less than 5 ns (typical) on OE#, CE# or WE# do not initiate a write  
cycle.  
Logical Inhibit  
Write cycles are inhibited by holding any one of OE# = VIL, CE# = VIH or WE# =  
VIH. To initiate a write cycle, CE# and WE# must be a logical zero while OE# is a  
logical one.  
Power-Up Write Inhibit  
If WE# = CE# = RESET# = VIL and OE# = VIH during power up, the device does  
not accept commands on the rising edge of WE#. The internal state machine is  
automatically reset to the read mode on power-up.  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
46  
Common Flash Memory Interface (CFI)  
The Common Flash Interface (CFI) specification outlines device and host system  
software interrogation handshake, which allows specific vendor-specified soft-  
ware algorithms to be used for entire families of devices. Software support can  
then be device-independent, JEDEC ID-independent, and forward- and back-  
ward-compatible for the specified flash device families. Flash vendors can  
standardize their existing interfaces for long-term compatibility.  
This device enters the CFI Query mode when the system writes the CFI Query  
command, 98h, to address 55h any time the device is ready to read array data.  
The system can read CFI information at the addresses given in Tables 8-11. To  
terminate reading CFI data, the system must write the reset command.  
The system can also write the CFI query command when the device is in the au-  
toselect mode. The device enters the CFI query mode, and the system can read  
CFI data at the addresses given in Tables 8-11. The system must write the reset  
command to return the device to the autoselect mode.  
For further information, please refer to the CFI Specification and CFI Publication  
100, available via the FASL site at the following URL:  
http://www.amd.com/us-en/FlashMemory/TechnicalResources/  
0,,37_1693_1780_1834^1955,00.html. Alternatively, contact an FASL represen-  
tative for copies of these documents.  
Table 8. CFI Query Identification String  
Addresses  
Data  
Description  
10h  
11h  
12h  
0051h  
0052h  
0059h  
Query Unique ASCII string “QRY”  
Primary OEM Command Set  
13h  
14h  
0002h  
0000h  
15h  
16h  
0040h  
0000h  
Address for Primary Extended Table  
17h  
18h  
0000h  
0000h  
Alternate OEM Command Set (00h = none exists)  
Address for Alternate OEM Extended Table (00h = none exists)  
19h  
1Ah  
0000h  
0000h  
47  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
Table 9. System Interface String  
Addresses  
Data  
Description  
VCC Min. (write/erase)  
D7–D4: volt, D3–D0: 100 millivolt  
1Bh  
0017h  
VCC Max. (write/erase)  
D7–D4: volt, D3–D0: 100 millivolt  
1Ch  
0019h  
1Dh  
1Eh  
1Fh  
20h  
21h  
22h  
23h  
24h  
25h  
26h  
0000h  
0000h  
0003h  
0000h  
0009h  
0000h  
0004h  
0000h  
0004h  
0000h  
VPP Min. voltage (00h = no VPP pin present)  
VPP Max. voltage (00h = no VPP pin present)  
Typical timeout per single byte/word write 2N µs  
Typical timeout for Min. size buffer write 2N µs (00h = not supported)  
Typical timeout per individual block erase 2N ms  
Typical timeout for full chip erase 2N ms (00h = not supported)  
Max. timeout for byte/word write 2N times typical  
Max. timeout for buffer write 2N times typical  
Max. timeout per individual block erase 2N times typical  
Max. timeout for full chip erase 2N times typical (00h = not supported)  
Table 10. Device Geometry Definition  
Addresses  
Data  
Description  
0018h (WS128J)  
0017h (WS064J)  
27h  
Device Size = 2N byte  
28h  
29h  
0001h  
0000h  
Flash Device Interface description (refer to CFI publication 100)  
2Ah  
2Bh  
0000h  
0000h  
Max. number of bytes in multi-byte write = 2N  
(00h = not supported)  
2Ch  
0003h  
Number of Erase Block Regions within device  
2Dh  
2Eh  
2Fh  
30h  
0007h  
0000h  
0020h  
0000h  
Erase Block Region 1 Information  
(refer to the CFI specification or CFI publication 100)  
00FDh (WS128J)  
007Dh (WS064J)  
31h  
Erase Block Region 2 Information  
32h  
33h  
34h  
0000h  
0000h  
0001h  
35h  
36h  
37h  
38h  
0007h  
0000h  
0020h  
0000h  
Erase Block Region 3 Information  
Erase Block Region 4 Information  
39h  
3Ah  
3Bh  
3Ch  
0000h  
0000h  
0000h  
0000h  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
48  
Table 11. Primary Vendor-Specific Extended Query  
Addresses  
Data  
Description  
40h  
41h  
42h  
0050h  
0052h  
0049h  
Query-unique ASCII string “PRI”  
43h  
44h  
0031h  
0033h  
Major version number, ASCII  
Minor version number, ASCII  
Address Sensitive Unlock (Bits 1-0)  
0 = Required, 1 = Not Required  
45h  
000Ch  
Silicon Technology (Bits 5-2) 0011 = 0.13 µm  
Erase Suspend  
0 = Not Supported, 1 = To Read Only, 2 = To Read & Write  
46h  
47h  
48h  
49h  
0002h  
0001h  
0001h  
0007h  
Sector Protect  
0 = Not Supported, X = Number of sectors in per group  
Sector Temporary Unprotect  
00 = Not Supported, 01 = Supported  
Sector Protect/Unprotect scheme  
07 = Advanced Sector Protection  
00E7h (WS128J)  
0077h (WS064J)  
Simultaneous Operation  
Number of Sectors in all banks except boot block  
4Ah  
Burst Mode Type  
00 = Not Supported, 01 = Supported  
4Bh  
4Ch  
0001h  
0000h  
Page Mode Type  
00 = Not Supported, 01 = 4 Word Page, 02 = 8 Word Page, 04 = 16 Word Page  
ACC (Acceleration) Supply Minimum  
4Dh  
4Eh  
4Fh  
00B5h  
00C5h  
0001h  
00h = Not Supported, D7-D4: Volt, D3-D0: 100 mV  
ACC (Acceleration) Supply Maximum  
00h = Not Supported, D7-D4: Volt, D3-D0: 100 mV  
Top/Bottom Boot Sector Flag  
01h = Dual Boot Device, 02h = Bottom Boot Device, 03h = Top Boot Device  
50h  
57h  
0000h  
0004h  
Program Suspend. 00h = not supported  
Bank Organization: X = Number of banks  
0027h (WS128J)  
0017h (WS064J)  
58h  
59h  
5Ah  
5Bh  
Bank A Region Information. X = Number of sectors in bank  
Bank B Region Information. X = Number of sectors in bank  
Bank C Region Information. X = Number of sectors in bank  
Bank D Region Information. X = Number of sectors in bank  
0060h (WS128J)  
0030h (WS064J)  
0060h (WS128J)  
0030h (WS064J)  
0027h (WS128J)  
0017h (WS064J)  
49  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
Table 12. WS128J Sector Address Table  
Bank  
Sector  
SA0  
Sector Size  
4 Kwords  
(x16) Address Range  
000000h-000FFFh  
001000h-001FFFh  
002000h-002FFFh  
003000h-003FFFh  
004000h-004FFFh  
005000h-005FFFh  
006000h-006FFFh  
007000h-007FFFh  
008000h-00FFFFh  
010000h-017FFFh  
018000h-01FFFFh  
020000h-027FFFh  
028000h-02FFFFh  
030000h-037FFFh  
038000h-03FFFFh  
040000h-047FFFh  
048000h-04FFFFh  
050000h-057FFFh  
058000h-05FFFFh  
060000h-067FFFh  
068000h-06FFFFh  
070000h-077FFFh  
078000h-07FFFFh  
080000h-087FFFh  
088000h-08FFFFh  
090000h-097FFFh  
098000h-09FFFFh  
0A0000h-0A7FFFh  
0A8000h-0AFFFFh  
0B0000h-0B7FFFh  
0B8000h-0BFFFFh  
0C0000h-0C7FFFh  
0C8000h-0CFFFFh  
0D0000h-0D7FFFh  
0D8000h-0DFFFFh  
0E0000h-0E7FFFh  
0E8000h-0EFFFFh  
0F0000h-0F7FFFh  
0F8000h-0FFFFFh  
SA1  
4 Kwords  
SA2  
4 Kwords  
SA3  
4 Kwords  
SA4  
4 Kwords  
SA5  
4 Kwords  
SA6  
4 Kwords  
SA7  
4 Kwords  
SA8  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
SA9  
SA10  
SA11  
SA12  
SA13  
SA14  
SA15  
SA16  
SA17  
SA18  
SA19  
SA20  
SA21  
SA22  
SA23  
SA24  
SA25  
SA26  
SA27  
SA28  
SA29  
SA30  
SA31  
SA32  
SA33  
SA34  
SA35  
SA36  
SA37  
SA38  
Bank D  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
50  
Table 12. WS128J Sector Address Table (Continued)  
Bank  
Sector  
Sector Size  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
(x16) Address Range  
100000h-107FFFh  
108000h-10FFFFh  
110000h-117FFFh  
118000h-11FFFFh  
120000h-127FFFh  
128000h-12FFFFh  
130000h-137FFFh  
138000h-13FFFFh  
140000h-147FFFh  
148000h-14FFFFh  
150000h-157FFFh  
158000h-15FFFFh  
160000h-167FFFh  
168000h-16FFFFh  
170000h-177FFFh  
178000h-17FFFFh  
180000h-187FFFh  
188000h-18FFFFh  
190000h-197FFFh  
198000h-19FFFFh  
1A0000h-1A7FFFh  
1A8000h-1AFFFFh  
1B0000h-1B7FFFh  
1B8000h-1BFFFFh  
1C0000h-1C7FFFh  
1C8000h-1CFFFFh  
1D0000h-1D7FFFh  
1D8000h-1DFFFFh  
1E0000h-1E7FFFh  
1E8000h-1EFFFFh  
1F0000h-1F7FFFh  
1F8000h-1FFFFFh  
SA39  
SA40  
SA41  
SA42  
SA43  
SA44  
SA45  
SA46  
SA47  
SA48  
SA49  
SA50  
SA51  
SA52  
SA53  
SA54  
SA55  
SA56  
SA57  
SA58  
SA59  
SA60  
SA61  
SA62  
SA63  
SA64  
SA65  
SA66  
SA67  
SA68  
SA69  
SA70  
Bank C  
51  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
Table 12. WS128J Sector Address Table (Continued)  
Bank  
Sector  
Sector Size  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
(x16) Address Range  
200000h-207FFFh  
208000h-20FFFFh  
210000h-217FFFh  
218000h-21FFFFh  
220000h-227FFFh  
228000h-22FFFFh  
230000h-237FFFh  
238000h-23FFFFh  
240000h-247FFFh  
248000h-24FFFFh  
250000h-257FFFh  
258000h-25FFFFh  
260000h-267FFFh  
268000h-26FFFFh  
270000h-277FFFh  
278000h-27FFFFh  
280000h-287FFFh  
288000h-28FFFFh  
290000h-297FFFh  
298000h-29FFFFh  
2A0000h-2A7FFFh  
2A8000h-2AFFFFh  
2B0000h-2B7FFFh  
2B8000h-2BFFFFh  
2C0000h-2C7FFFh  
2C8000h-2CFFFFh  
2D0000h-2D7FFFh  
2D8000h-2DFFFFh  
2E0000h-2E7FFFh  
2E8000h-2EFFFFh  
2F0000h-2F7FFFh  
2F8000h-2FFFFFh  
SA71  
SA72  
SA73  
SA74  
SA75  
SA76  
SA77  
SA78  
SA79  
SA80  
SA81  
SA82  
SA83  
SA84  
SA85  
SA86  
SA87  
SA88  
SA89  
SA90  
SA91  
SA92  
SA93  
SA94  
SA95  
SA96  
SA97  
SA98  
SA99  
SA100  
SA101  
SA102  
Bank C  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
52  
Table 12. WS128J Sector Address Table (Continued)  
Bank  
Sector  
Sector Size  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
(x16) Address Range  
300000h-307FFFh  
308000h-30FFFFh  
310000h-317FFFh  
318000h-31FFFFh  
320000h-327FFFh  
328000h-32FFFFh  
330000h-337FFFh  
338000h-33FFFFh  
340000h-347FFFh  
348000h-34FFFFh  
350000h-357FFFh  
358000h-35FFFFh  
360000h-367FFFh  
368000h-36FFFFh  
370000h-377FFFh  
378000h-37FFFFh  
380000h-387FFFh  
388000h-38FFFFh  
390000h-397FFFh  
398000h-39FFFFh  
3A0000h-3A7FFFh  
3A8000h-3AFFFFh  
3B0000h-3B7FFFh  
3B8000h-3BFFFFh  
3C0000h-3C7FFFh  
3C8000h-3CFFFFh  
3D0000h-3D7FFFh  
3D8000h-3DFFFFh  
3E0000h-3E7FFFh  
3E8000h-3EFFFFh  
3F0000h-3F7FFFh  
3F8000h-3FFFFFh  
SA103  
SA104  
SA105  
SA106  
SA107  
SA108  
SA109  
SA110  
SA111  
SA112  
SA113  
SA114  
SA115  
SA116  
SA117  
SA118  
SA119  
SA120  
SA121  
SA122  
SA123  
SA124  
SA125  
SA126  
SA127  
SA128  
SA129  
SA130  
SA131  
SA132  
SA133  
SA134  
Bank C  
53  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
Table 12. WS128J Sector Address Table (Continued)  
Bank  
Sector  
Sector Size  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
(x16) Address Range  
400000h-407FFFh  
408000h-40FFFFh  
410000h-417FFFh  
418000h-41FFFFh  
420000h-427FFFh  
428000h-42FFFFh  
430000h-437FFFh  
438000h-43FFFFh  
440000h-447FFFh  
448000h-44FFFFh  
450000h-457FFFh  
458000h-45FFFFh  
460000h-467FFFh  
468000h-46FFFFh  
470000h-477FFFh  
478000h-47FFFFh  
480000h-487FFFh  
488000h-48FFFFh  
490000h-497FFFh  
498000h-49FFFFh  
4A0000h-4A7FFFh  
4A8000h-4AFFFFh  
4B0000h-4B7FFFh  
4B8000h-4BFFFFh  
4C0000h-4C7FFFh  
4C8000h-4CFFFFh  
4D0000h-4D7FFFh  
4D8000h-4DFFFFh  
4E0000h-4E7FFFh  
4E8000h-4EFFFFh  
4F0000h-4F7FFFh  
4F8000h-4FFFFFh  
SA135  
SA136  
SA137  
SA138  
SA139  
SA140  
SA141  
SA142  
SA143  
SA144  
SA145  
SA146  
SA147  
SA148  
SA149  
SA150  
SA151  
SA152  
SA153  
SA154  
SA155  
SA156  
SA157  
SA158  
SA159  
SA160  
SA161  
SA162  
SA163  
SA164  
SA165  
SA166  
Bank B  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
54  
Table 12. WS128J Sector Address Table (Continued)  
Bank  
Sector  
Sector Size  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
(x16) Address Range  
500000h-507FFFh  
508000h-50FFFFh  
510000h-517FFFh  
518000h-51FFFFh  
520000h-527FFFh  
528000h-52FFFFh  
530000h-537FFFh  
538000h-53FFFFh  
540000h-547FFFh  
548000h-54FFFFh  
550000h-557FFFh  
558000h-55FFFFh  
560000h-567FFFh  
568000h-56FFFFh  
570000h-577FFFh  
578000h-57FFFFh  
580000h-587FFFh  
588000h-58FFFFh  
590000h-597FFFh  
598000h-59FFFFh  
5A0000h-5A7FFFh  
5A8000h-5AFFFFh  
5B0000h-5B7FFFh  
5B8000h-5BFFFFh  
5C0000h-5C7FFFh  
5C8000h-5CFFFFh  
5D0000h-5D7FFFh  
5D8000h-5DFFFFh  
5E0000h-5E7FFFh  
5E8000h-5EFFFFh  
5F0000h-5F7FFFh  
5F8000h-5FFFFFh  
SA167  
SA168  
SA169  
SA170  
SA171  
SA172  
SA173  
SA174  
SA175  
SA176  
SA177  
SA178  
SA179  
SA180  
SA181  
SA182  
SA183  
SA184  
SA185  
SA186  
SA187  
SA188  
SA189  
SA190  
SA191  
SA192  
SA193  
SA194  
SA195  
SA196  
SA197  
SA198  
Bank B  
55  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
Table 12. WS128J Sector Address Table (Continued)  
Bank  
Sector  
Sector Size  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
(x16) Address Range  
600000h-607FFFh  
608000h-60FFFFh  
610000h-617FFFh  
618000h-61FFFFh  
620000h-627FFFh  
628000h-62FFFFh  
630000h-637FFFh  
638000h-63FFFFh  
640000h-647FFFh  
648000h-64FFFFh  
650000h-657FFFh  
658000h-65FFFFh  
660000h-667FFFh  
668000h-66FFFFh  
670000h-677FFFh  
678000h-67FFFFh  
680000h-687FFFh  
688000h-68FFFFh  
690000h-697FFFh  
698000h-69FFFFh  
6A0000h-6A7FFFh  
6A8000h-6AFFFFh  
6B0000h-6B7FFFh  
6B8000h-6BFFFFh  
6C0000h-6C7FFFh  
6C8000h-6CFFFFh  
6D0000h-6D7FFFh  
6D8000h-6DFFFFh  
6E0000h-6E7FFFh  
6E8000h-6EFFFFh  
6F0000h-6F7FFFh  
6F8000h-6FFFFFh  
SA199  
SA200  
SA201  
SA202  
SA203  
SA204  
SA205  
SA206  
SA207  
SA208  
SA209  
SA210  
SA211  
SA212  
SA213  
SA214  
SA215  
SA216  
SA217  
SA218  
SA219  
SA220  
SA221  
SA222  
SA223  
SA224  
SA225  
SA226  
SA227  
SA228  
SA229  
SA230  
Bank B  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
56  
Table 12. WS128J Sector Address Table (Continued)  
Bank  
Sector  
Sector Size  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
4 Kwords  
(x16) Address Range  
700000h-707FFFh  
708000h-70FFFFh  
710000h-717FFFh  
718000h-71FFFFh  
720000h-727FFFh  
728000h-72FFFFh  
730000h-737FFFh  
738000h-73FFFFh  
740000h-747FFFh  
748000h-74FFFFh  
750000h-757FFFh  
758000h-75FFFFh  
760000h-767FFFh  
768000h-76FFFFh  
770000h-777FFFh  
778000h-77FFFFh  
780000h-787FFFh  
788000h-78FFFFh  
790000h-797FFFh  
798000h-79FFFFh  
7A0000h-7A7FFFh  
7A8000h-7AFFFFh  
7B0000h-7B7FFFh  
7B8000h-7BFFFFh  
7C0000h-7C7FFFh  
7C8000h-7CFFFFh  
7D0000h-7D7FFFh  
7D8000h-7DFFFFh  
7E0000h-7E7FFFh  
7E8000h-7EFFFFh  
7F0000h-7F7FFFh  
7F8000h-7F8FFFh  
7F9000h-7F9FFFh  
7FA000h-7FAFFFh  
7FB000h-7FBFFFh  
7FC000h-7FCFFFh  
7FD000h-7FDFFFh  
7FE000h-7FEFFFh  
7FF000h-7FFFFFh  
SA231  
SA232  
SA233  
SA234  
SA235  
SA236  
SA237  
SA238  
SA239  
SA240  
SA241  
SA242  
SA243  
SA244  
SA245  
SA246  
SA247  
SA248  
SA249  
SA250  
SA251  
SA252  
SA253  
SA254  
SA255  
SA256  
SA257  
SA258  
SA259  
SA260  
SA261  
SA262  
SA263  
SA264  
SA265  
SA266  
SA267  
SA268  
SA269  
Bank A  
4 Kwords  
4 Kwords  
4 Kwords  
4 Kwords  
4 Kwords  
4 Kwords  
4 Kwords  
57  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
Table 13. WS064J Sector Address Table  
Bank  
Sector  
SA0  
Sector Size  
4 Kwords  
4 Kwords  
4 Kwords  
4 Kwords  
4 Kwords  
4 Kwords  
4 Kwords  
4 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
(x16) Address Range  
000000h-000FFFh  
001000h-001FFFh  
002000h-002FFFh  
003000h-003FFFh  
004000h-004FFFh  
005000h-005FFFh  
006000h-006FFFh  
007000h-007FFFh  
008000h-00FFFFh  
010000h-017FFFh  
018000h-01FFFFh  
020000h-027FFFh  
028000h-02FFFFh  
030000h-037FFFh  
038000h-03FFFFh  
040000h-047FFFh  
048000h-04FFFFh  
050000h-057FFFh  
058000h-05FFFFh  
060000h-067FFFh  
068000h-06FFFFh  
070000h-077FFFh  
078000h-07FFFFh  
SA1  
SA2  
SA3  
SA4  
SA5  
SA6  
SA7  
SA8  
SA9  
SA10  
SA11  
SA12  
SA13  
SA14  
SA15  
SA16  
SA17  
SA18  
SA19  
SA20  
SA21  
SA22  
Bank D  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
58  
Table 13. WS064J Sector Address Table (Continued)  
Bank  
Sector  
Sector Size  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
(x16) Address Range  
080000h-087FFFh  
088000h-08FFFFh  
090000h-097FFFh  
098000h-09FFFFh  
0A0000h-0A7FFFh  
0A8000h-0AFFFFh  
0B0000h-0B7FFFh  
0B8000h-0BFFFFh  
0C0000h-0C7FFFh  
0C8000h-0CFFFFh  
0D0000h-0D7FFFh  
0D8000h-0DFFFFh  
0E0000h-0E7FFFh  
0E8000h-0EFFFFh  
0F0000h-0F7FFFh  
0F8000h-0FFFFFh  
100000h-107FFFh  
108000h-10FFFFh  
110000h-117FFFh  
118000h-11FFFFh  
120000h-127FFFh  
128000h-12FFFFh  
130000h-137FFFh  
138000h-13FFFFh  
SA23  
SA24  
SA25  
SA26  
SA27  
SA28  
SA29  
SA30  
SA31  
SA32  
SA33  
SA34  
SA35  
SA36  
SA37  
SA38  
SA39  
SA40  
SA41  
SA42  
SA43  
SA44  
SA45  
SA46  
Bank C  
59  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
Table 13. WS064J Sector Address Table (Continued)  
Bank  
Sector  
Sector Size  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
(x16) Address Range  
140000h-147FFFh  
148000h-14FFFFh  
150000h-157FFFh  
158000h-15FFFFh  
160000h-167FFFh  
168000h-16FFFFh  
170000h-177FFFh  
178000h-17FFFFh  
180000h-187FFFh  
188000h-18FFFFh  
190000h-197FFFh  
198000h-19FFFFh  
1A0000h-1A7FFFh  
1A8000h-1AFFFFh  
1B0000h-1B7FFFh  
1B8000h-1BFFFFh  
1C0000h-1C7FFFh  
1C8000h-1CFFFFh  
1D0000h-1D7FFFh  
1D8000h-1DFFFFh  
1E0000h-1E7FFFh  
1E8000h-1EFFFFh  
1F0000h-1F7FFFh  
1F8000h-1FFFFFh  
SA47  
SA48  
SA49  
SA50  
SA51  
SA52  
SA53  
SA54  
SA55  
SA56  
SA57  
SA58  
SA59  
SA60  
SA61  
SA62  
SA63  
SA64  
SA65  
SA66  
SA67  
SA68  
SA69  
SA70  
Bank C  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
60  
Table 13. WS064J Sector Address Table (Continued)  
Bank  
Sector  
Sector Size  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
(x16) Address Range  
200000h-207FFFh  
208000h-20FFFFh  
210000h-217FFFh  
218000h-21FFFFh  
220000h-227FFFh  
228000h-22FFFFh  
230000h-237FFFh  
238000h-23FFFFh  
240000h-247FFFh  
248000h-24FFFFh  
250000h-257FFFh  
258000h-25FFFFh  
260000h-267FFFh  
268000h-26FFFFh  
270000h-277FFFh  
278000h-27FFFFh  
280000h-287FFFh  
288000h-28FFFFh  
290000h-297FFFh  
298000h-29FFFFh  
2A0000h-2A7FFFh  
2A8000h-2AFFFFh  
2B0000h-2B7FFFh  
2B8000h-2BFFFFh  
SA71  
SA72  
SA73  
SA74  
SA75  
SA76  
SA77  
SA78  
SA79  
SA80  
SA81  
SA82  
SA83  
SA84  
SA85  
SA86  
SA87  
SA88  
SA89  
SA90  
SA91  
SA92  
SA93  
SA94  
Bank B  
61  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
Table 13. WS064J Sector Address Table (Continued)  
Bank  
Sector  
Sector Size  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
(x16) Address Range  
2C0000h-2C7FFFh  
2C8000h-2CFFFFh  
2D0000h-2D7FFFh  
2D8000h-2DFFFFh  
2E0000h-2E7FFFh  
2E8000h-2EFFFFh  
2F0000h-2F7FFFh  
2F8000h-2FFFFFh  
300000h-307FFFh  
308000h-30FFFFh  
310000h-317FFFh  
318000h-31FFFFh  
320000h-327FFFh  
328000h-32FFFFh  
330000h-337FFFh  
338000h-33FFFFh  
340000h-347FFFh  
348000h-34FFFFh  
350000h-357FFFh  
358000h-35FFFFh  
360000h-367FFFh  
368000h-36FFFFh  
370000h-377FFFh  
378000h-37FFFFh  
SA95  
SA96  
SA97  
SA98  
SA99  
SA100  
SA101  
SA102  
SA103  
SA104  
SA105  
SA106  
SA107  
SA108  
SA109  
SA110  
SA111  
SA112  
SA113  
SA114  
SA115  
SA116  
SA117  
SA118  
Bank B  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
62  
Table 13. WS064J Sector Address Table (Continued)  
Bank  
Sector  
Sector Size  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
32 Kwords  
4 Kwords  
4 Kwords  
4 Kwords  
4 Kwords  
4 Kwords  
4 Kwords  
4 Kwords  
4 Kwords  
(x16) Address Range  
380000h-387FFFh  
388000h-38FFFFh  
390000h-397FFFh  
398000h-39FFFFh  
3A0000h-3A7FFFh  
3A8000h-3AFFFFh  
3B0000h-3B7FFFh  
3B8000h-3BFFFFh  
3C0000h-3C7FFFh  
3C8000h-3CFFFFh  
3D0000h-3D7FFFh  
3D8000h-3DFFFFh  
3E0000h-3E7FFFh  
3E8000h-3EFFFFh  
3F0000h-3F7FFFh  
3F8000h-3F8FFFh  
3F9000h-3F9FFFh  
3FA000h-3FAFFFh  
3FB000h-3FBFFFh  
3FC000h-3FCFFFh  
3FD000h-3FDFFFh  
3FE000h-3FEFFFh  
3FF000h-3FFFFFh  
SA119  
SA120  
SA121  
SA122  
SA123  
SA124  
SA125  
SA126  
SA127  
SA128  
SA129  
SA130  
SA131  
SA132  
SA133  
SA134  
SA135  
SA136  
SA137  
SA138  
SA139  
SA140  
SA141  
Bank A  
63  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
Command Definitions  
Writing specific address and data commands or sequences into the command  
register initiates device operations. Table 18, “Command Definitions,on page 78  
defines the valid register command sequences. Writing incorrect address and  
data values or writing them in the improper sequence may place the device in an  
unknown state. The system must write the reset command to return the device  
to reading array data. Refer to the AC Characteristics section for timing diagrams.  
Reading Array Data  
The device is automatically set to reading array data after device power-up. No  
commands are required to retrieve data in asynchronous mode. Each bank is  
ready to read array data after completing an Embedded Program or Embedded  
Erase algorithm.  
After the device accepts an Erase Suspend command, the corresponding bank  
enters the erase-suspend-read mode, after which the system can read data from  
any non-erase-suspended sector within the same bank. After completing a pro-  
gramming operation in the Erase Suspend mode, the system may once again  
read array data from any non-erase-suspended sector within the same bank. See  
the “Erase Suspend/Erase Resume Commands” section on page 73 for more  
information.  
The system must issue the reset command to return a bank to the read (or erase-  
suspend-read) mode if DQ5 goes high during an active program or erase opera-  
tion, or if the bank is in the autoselect mode. See the “Reset Command” section  
on page 68 for more information.  
See also “Requirements for Asynchronous Read Operation (Non-Burst)” section  
on page 27 and “Requirements for Synchronous (Burst) Read Operation” section  
on page 28 for more information. The Asynchronous Read and Synchronous/  
Burst Read tables provide the read parameters, and Figure 14, “CLK Synchronous  
Burst Mode Read (rising active CLK),on page 94, Figure 16, “Synchronous Burst  
Mode Read,on page 95, and Figure 19, “Asynchronous Mode Read with Latched  
Addresses,on page 98 show the timings.  
Set Configuration Register Command Sequence  
The device uses a configuration register to set the various burst parameters:  
number of wait states, burst read mode, active clock edge, RDY configuration,  
and synchronous mode active. The configuration register must be set before the  
device will enter burst mode.  
The configuration register is loaded with a three-cycle command sequence. The  
first two cycles are standard unlock sequences. On the third cycle, the data  
should be C0h, address bits A11–A0 should be 555h, and address bits A19–A12  
set the code to be latched. The device will power up or after a hardware reset  
with the default setting, which is in asynchronous mode. The register must be set  
before the device can enter synchronous mode. The configuration register can  
not be changed during device operations (program, erase, or sector lock).  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
64  
Power-up/  
Hardware Reset  
Asynchronous Read  
Mode Only  
Set Burst Mode  
Configuration Register  
Command for  
Set Burst Mode  
Configuration Register  
Command for  
Synchronous Mode  
(D15 = 0)  
Asynchronous Mode  
(D15 = 1)  
Synchronous Read  
Mode Only  
Figure 3. Synchronous/Asynchronous State Diagram  
Read Mode Setting  
On power-up or hardware reset, the device is set to be in asynchronous read  
mode. This setting allows the system to enable or disable burst mode during sys-  
tem operations. Address A19 determines this setting: “1’ for asynchronous mode,  
“0” for synchronous mode.  
Programmable Wait State Configuration  
The programmable wait state feature informs the device of the number of clock  
cycles that must elapse after AVD# is driven active before data will be available.  
This value is determined by the input frequency of the device. Address bits A14–  
A12 determine the setting (see Table 14, “Programmable Wait State Settings,on  
page 66).  
The wait state command sequence instructs the device to set a particular number  
of clock cycles for the initial access in burst mode. The number of wait states that  
should be programmed into the device is directly related to the clock frequency.  
65  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
Table 14. Programmable Wait State Settings  
A14  
0
A13  
0
A12  
0
Total Initial Access Cycles  
2
0
0
1
3
0
1
0
4
5
0
1
1
1
0
0
6
1
0
1
7 (default)  
Reserved  
Reserved  
1
1
0
1
1
1
Notes:  
1. Upon power-up or hardware reset, the default setting is seven wait states.  
2. RDY will default to being active with data when the Wait State Setting is set to a total initial access cycle of 2.  
It is recommended that the wait state command sequence be written, even if the  
default wait state value is desired, to ensure the device is set as expected. A  
hardware reset will set the wait state to the default setting.  
Standard wait-state Handshaking Option  
The host system must set the appropriate number of wait states in the flash de-  
vice depending upon the clock frequency. The host system should set address bits  
A14–A12 to 010 for a clock frequency of 66/80 MHz.  
Table 15 describes the typical number of clock cycles (wait states) for various  
conditions.  
Table 15. Wait States for Standard wait-state Handshaking  
Typical No. of Clock Cycles after AVD# Low  
Burst Mode  
8-Word or 16-Word or Continuous  
32-Word  
Conditions  
VIO = 1.8 V  
VIO = 1.8 V  
66/80 MHz  
4
5
* In the 8-, 16- and 32-word burst read modes, the address pointer does not cross 64-word boundaries (addresses  
which are multiples of 3Fh).  
The host system must set the appropriate number of wait states in the flash de-  
vice depending upon the clock frequency. The autoselect function allows the host  
system to determine whether the flash device is enabled for handshaking. See  
the “Autoselect Command Sequence” section on page 68 for more information.  
Read Mode Configuration  
The device supports four different read modes: continuous mode, and 8, 16, and  
32 word linear wrap around modes. A continuous sequence begins at the starting  
address and advances the address pointer until the burst operation is complete.  
If the highest address in the device is reached during the continuous burst read  
mode, the address pointer wraps around to the lowest address.  
For example, an eight-word linear read with wrap around begins on the starting  
address written to the device and then advances to the next 8 word boundary.  
The address pointer then returns to the 1st word after the previous eight word  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
66  
boundary, wrapping through the starting location. The sixteen- and thirty-two lin-  
ear wrap around modes operate in a fashion similar to the eight-word mode.  
Table 16 shows the address bits and settings for the four read modes.  
Table 16. Read Mode Settings  
Address Bits  
Burst Modes  
A16  
0
A15  
0
Continuous  
8-word linear wrap around  
16-word linear wrap around  
32-word linear wrap around  
0
1
1
0
1
1
Note: Upon power-up or hardware reset the default setting is continuous.  
Burst Active Clock Edge Configuration  
By default, the device will deliver data on the rising edge of the clock after the  
initial synchronous access time. Subsequent outputs will also be on the following  
rising edges, barring any delays. The device can be set so that the falling clock  
edge is active for all synchronous accesses. Address bit A17 determines this set-  
ting; “1” for rising active, “0” for falling active.  
RDY Configuration  
By default, the device is set so that the RDY pin will output VOH whenever there  
is valid data on the outputs. The device can be set so that RDY goes active one  
data cycle before active data. Address bit A18 determines this setting; “1” for  
RDY active with data, “0” for RDY active one clock cycle before valid data. In  
asynchronous mode, RDY is an open-drain output.  
Configuration Register  
Table 17 shows the address bits that determine the configuration register settings  
for various device functions.  
67  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
Table 17. Configuration Register  
Settings (Binary)  
Address Bit  
Function  
Set Device  
Read Mode  
0 = Synchronous Read (Burst Mode) Enabled  
1 = Asynchronous Mode (default)  
A19  
0 = RDY active one clock cycle before data  
1 = RDY active with data (default)  
A18  
RDY  
0 = Burst starts and data is output on the falling edge of CLK  
1 = Burst starts and data is output on the rising edge of CLK (default)  
A17  
A16  
Clock  
Synchronous Mode  
00 = Continuous (default)  
Read Mode  
01 = 8-word linear with wrap around  
10 = 16-word linear with wrap around  
11 = 32-word linear with wrap around  
A15  
A14  
A13  
000 = Data is valid on the 2nd active CLK edge after AVD# transition to VIH  
001 = Data is valid on the 3rd active CLK edge after AVD# transition to VIH  
010 = Data is valid on the 4th active CLK edge after AVD# transition to VIH  
011 = Data is valid on the 5th active CLK edge after AVD# transition to VIH  
100 = Data is valid on the 6th active CLK edge after AVD# transition to VIH  
101 = Data is valid on the 7th active CLK edge after AVD# transition to VIH (default)  
Programmable  
Wait State  
A12  
110 = Reserved  
111 = Reserved  
Note: Device will be in the default state upon power-up or hardware reset.  
Reset Command  
Writing the reset command resets the banks to the read or erase-suspend-read  
mode. Address bits are don’t cares for this command.  
The reset command may be written between the sequence cycles in an erase  
command sequence before erasing begins. This resets the bank to which the sys-  
tem was writing to the read mode. Once erasure begins, however, the device  
ignores reset commands until the operation is complete.  
The reset command may be written between the sequence cycles in a program  
command sequence before programming begins (prior to the third cycle). This re-  
sets the bank to which the system was writing to the read mode. If the program  
command sequence is written to a bank that is in the Erase Suspend mode, writ-  
ing the reset command returns that bank to the erase-suspend-read mode. Once  
programming begins, however, the device ignores reset commands until the op-  
eration is complete.  
The reset command may be written between the sequence cycles in an autoselect  
command sequence. Once in the autoselect mode, the reset command must be  
written to return to the read mode. If a bank entered the autoselect mode while  
in the Erase Suspend mode, writing the reset command returns that bank to the  
erase-suspend-read mode.  
If DQ5 goes high during a program or erase operation, writing the reset command  
returns the banks to the read mode (or erase-suspend-read mode if that bank  
was in Erase Suspend).  
Autoselect Command Sequence  
The autoselect command sequence allows the host system to access the manu-  
facturer and device codes, and determine whether or not a sector is protected.  
Table 18, “Command Definitions,on page 78 shows the address and data re-  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
68  
quirements. The autoselect command sequence may be written to an address  
within a bank that is either in the read or erase-suspend-read mode. The autose-  
lect command may not be written while the device is actively programming or  
erasing in the other bank.  
The autoselect command sequence is initiated by first writing two unlock cycles.  
This is followed by a third write cycle that contains the bank address and the au-  
toselect command. The bank then enters the autoselect mode. No subsequent  
data will be made available if the autoselect data is read in synchronous mode.  
The system may read at any address within the same bank any number of times  
without initiating another autoselect command sequence. Read commands to  
other banks will return data from the array. The following table describes the ad-  
dress requirements for the various autoselect functions, and the resulting data.  
BA represents the bank address, and SA represents the sector address. The de-  
vice ID is read in three cycles.  
Description  
Manufacturer ID  
Device ID, Word 1  
Address  
(BA) + 00h  
(BA) + 01h  
Read Data  
0001h  
227Eh  
2218h (WS128J)  
221Eh (WS064J)  
Device ID, Word 2  
Device ID, Word 3  
(BA) + 0Eh  
2200h (WS128J)  
2201h (WS064J)  
(BA) + 0Fh  
(SA) + 02h  
Sector Protection  
Verification  
0001 (locked),  
0000 (unlocked)  
DQ15 - DQ8 = 0  
DQ7 - Factory Lock Bit  
1 = Locked, 0 = Not Locked  
DQ6 -Customer Lock Bit  
1 = Locked, 0 = Not Locked  
DQ5 - Handshake Bit  
1 = Reserved,  
Indicator Bits  
(BA) + 03h  
0 = Standard Handshake  
DQ4 & DQ3 - Boot Code  
00 = Dual Boot Sector,  
01 = Top Boot Sector,  
10 = Bottom Boot Sector  
DQ2 - DQ0 = 001  
The system must write the reset command to return to the read mode (or erase-  
suspend-read mode if the bank was previously in Erase Suspend).  
Enter SecSi™ Sector/Exit SecSi™ Sector Command Sequence  
The SecSi™ Sector region provides a secured data area containing a random,  
eight word electronic serial number (ESN). The system can access the SecSi™  
Sector region by issuing the three-cycle Enter SecSi™ Sector command se-  
quence. The device continues to access the SecSi™ Sector region until the  
system issues the four-cycle Exit SecSi™ Sector command sequence. The Exit  
SecSi™ Sector command sequence returns the device to normal operation. The  
SecSi™ Sector is not accessible when the device is executing an Embedded Pro-  
gram or embedded Erase algorithm. Table 18, “Command Definitions,on  
69  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
page 78 shows the address and data requirements for both command  
sequences.  
The following commands are not allowed when the SecSi™ is accessible.  
— CFI  
— Unlock Bypass Entry  
— Unlock Bypass Program  
— Unlock Bypass Reset  
— Erase Suspend/Resume  
— Chip Erase  
Program Command Sequence  
Programming is a four-bus-cycle operation. The program command sequence is  
initiated by writing two unlock write cycles, followed by the program set-up com-  
mand. The program address and data are written next, which in turn initiate the  
Embedded Program algorithm. The system is not required to provide further con-  
trols or timings. The device automatically provides internally generated program  
pulses and verifies the programmed cell margin. Table 18, “Command Defini-  
tions,on page 78 shows the address and data requirements for the program  
command sequence.  
When the Embedded Program algorithm is complete, that bank then returns to  
the read mode and addresses are no longer latched. The system can determine  
the status of the program operation by monitoring DQ7 or DQ6/DQ2. Refer to the  
“Write Operation Status” section on page 81 for information on these status bits.  
Any commands written to the device during the Embedded Program Algorithm  
are ignored. Note that a hardware reset immediately terminates the program op-  
eration. The program command sequence should be reinitiated once that bank  
has returned to the read mode, to ensure data integrity.  
Programming is allowed in any sequence and across sector boundaries. A bit can-  
not be programmed from “0” back to a “1.Attempting to do so may cause that  
bank to set DQ5 = 1, or cause the DQ7 and DQ6 status bit to indicate the oper-  
ation was successful. However, a succeeding read will show that the data is still  
“0.Only erase operations can convert a “0” to a “1.”  
Unlock Bypass Command Sequence  
The unlock bypass feature allows the system to primarily program to a array  
faster than using the standard program command sequence. The unlock bypass  
command sequence is initiated by first writing two unlock cycles. This is followed  
by a third write cycle containing the unlock bypass command, 20h. The device  
then enters the unlock bypass mode. A two-cycle unlock bypass program com-  
mand sequence is all that is required to program in this mode. The first cycle in  
this sequence contains the unlock bypass program command, A0h; the second  
cycle contains the program address and data. Additional data is programmed in  
the same manner. This mode dispenses with the initial two unlock cycles required  
in the standard program command sequence, resulting in faster total program-  
ming time. The host system may also initiate the chip erase and sector erase  
sequences in the unlock bypass mode. The erase command sequences are four  
cycles in length instead of six cycles. Table 18, “Command Definitions,on  
page 78 shows the requirements for the unlock bypass command sequences.  
During the unlock bypass mode, only the Read, Unlock Bypass Program, Unlock  
Bypass Sector Erase, Unlock Bypass Chip Erase, and Unlock Bypass Reset com-  
mands are valid. To exit the unlock bypass mode, the system must issue the two-  
cycle unlock bypass reset command sequence. The first cycle must contain the  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
70  
bank address and the data 90h. The second cycle need only contain the data 00h.  
The array then returns to the read mode.  
The device offers accelerated program operations through the ACC input. When  
the system asserts VHH on this input, the device automatically enters the Unlock  
Bypass mode. The system may then write the two-cycle Unlock Bypass program  
command sequence. The device uses the higher voltage on the ACC input to ac-  
celerate the operation.  
Figure 4, “Program Operation,on page 71 illustrates the algorithm for the pro-  
gram operation. Refer to the Erase/Program Operations table in the AC  
Characteristics section for parameters, and Figure 22, “Asynchronous Program  
Operation Timings: AVD# Latched Addresses,on page 101 and Figure 24, “Syn-  
chronous Program Operation Timings: WE# Latched Addresses,on page 103 for  
timing diagrams.  
START  
Write Program  
Command Sequence  
Data Poll  
from System  
Embedded  
Program  
algorithm  
in progress  
Verify Data?  
No  
Yes  
No  
Increment Address  
Last Address?  
Yes  
Programming  
Completed  
Note: See Table 18 for program command sequence.  
Figure 4. Program Operation  
Chip Erase Command Sequence  
Chip erase is a six bus cycle operation. The chip erase command sequence is ini-  
tiated by writing two unlock cycles, followed by a set-up command. Two  
additional unlock write cycles are then followed by the chip erase command,  
which in turn invokes the Embedded Erase algorithm. The device does not require  
the system to preprogram prior to erase. The Embedded Erase algorithm auto-  
matically preprograms and verifies the entire memory for an all zero data pattern  
prior to electrical erase. The system is not required to provide any controls or tim-  
ings during these operations. Table 18, “Command Definitions,on page 78  
shows the address and data requirements for the chip erase command sequence.  
When the Embedded Erase algorithm is complete, that bank returns to the read  
mode and addresses are no longer latched. The system can determine the status  
71  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
of the erase operation by using DQ7 or DQ6/DQ2. Refer to the “Write Operation  
Status” section on page 81 for information on these status bits.  
Any commands written during the chip erase operation are ignored. However,  
note that a hardware reset immediately terminates the erase operation. If that  
occurs, the chip erase command sequence should be reinitiated once that bank  
has returned to reading array data, to ensure data integrity.  
The host system may also initiate the chip erase command sequence while the  
device is in the unlock bypass mode. The command sequence is two cycles in  
length instead of six cycles. See Table 18, “Command Definitions,on page 78 for  
details on the unlock bypass command sequences.  
Figure 5, “Erase Operation,on page 74 illustrates the algorithm for the erase op-  
eration. Refer to the Erase/Program Operations table in the AC Characteristics  
section for parameters and timing diagrams.  
Sector Erase Command Sequence  
Sector erase is a six bus cycle operation. The sector erase command sequence is  
initiated by writing two unlock cycles, followed by a set-up command. Two addi-  
tional unlock cycles are written, and are then followed by the address of the  
sector to be erased, and the sector erase command. Table 18, “Command Defi-  
nitions,on page 78 shows the address and data requirements for the sector  
erase command sequence.  
The device does not require the system to preprogram prior to erase. The Em-  
bedded Erase algorithm automatically programs and verifies the entire memory  
for an all zero data pattern prior to electrical erase. The system is not required to  
provide any controls or timings during these operations.  
After the command sequence is written, a sector erase time-out of no less than  
50 µs occurs. During the time-out period, additional sector addresses and sector  
erase commands may be written. Loading the sector erase buffer may be done  
in any sequence, and the number of sectors may be from one sector to all sectors.  
The time between these additional cycles must be less than 50 µs, otherwise era-  
sure may begin. Any sector erase address and command following the exceeded  
time-out may or may not be accepted. It is recommended that processor inter-  
rupts be disabled during this time to ensure all commands are accepted. The  
interrupts can be re-enabled after the last Sector Erase command is written. Any  
command other than Sector Erase or Erase Suspend during the time-out period  
resets that bank to the read mode. The system must rewrite the command se-  
quence and any additional addresses and commands.  
The system can monitor DQ3 to determine if the sector erase timer has timed out  
(See “DQ3: Sector Erase Timer” section on page 86.) The time-out begins from  
the rising edge of the final WE# pulse in the command sequence.  
When the Embedded Erase algorithm is complete, the bank returns to reading  
array data and addresses are no longer latched. Note that while the Embedded  
Erase operation is in progress, the system can read data from the non-erasing  
bank. The system can determine the status of the erase operation by reading  
DQ7 or DQ6/DQ2 in the erasing bank. Refer to the “Write Operation Status” sec-  
tion on page 81 for information on these status bits.  
Once the sector erase operation has begun, only the Erase Suspend command is  
valid. All other commands are ignored. However, note that a hardware reset im-  
mediately terminates the erase operation. If that occurs, the sector erase  
command sequence should be reinitiated once that bank has returned to reading  
array data, to ensure data integrity.  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
72  
The host system may also initiate the sector erase command sequence while the  
device is in the unlock bypass mode. The command sequence is four cycles cycles  
in length instead of six cycles.  
Figure 5, “Erase Operation,on page 74 illustrates the algorithm for the erase op-  
eration. Refer to the Erase/Program Operations table in the Figure , “AC  
Characteristics,on page 100 for parameters and timing diagrams.  
Erase Suspend/Erase Resume Commands  
The Erase Suspend command, B0h, allows the system to interrupt a sector erase  
operation and then read data from, or program data to, any sector not selected  
for erasure. The bank address is required when writing this command. This com-  
mand is valid only during the sector erase operation, including the minimum 50  
µs time-out period during the sector erase command sequence. The Erase Sus-  
pend command is ignored if written during the chip erase operation or Embedded  
Program algorithm.  
When the Erase Suspend command is written during the sector erase operation,  
the device requires a maximum of 35 µs to suspend the erase operation. How-  
ever, when the Erase Suspend command is written during the sector erase time-  
out, the device immediately terminates the time-out period and suspends the  
erase operation.  
After the erase operation has been suspended, the bank enters the erase-sus-  
pend-read mode. The system can read data from or program data to any sector  
not selected for erasure. (The device “erase suspends” all sectors selected for  
erasure.) Reading at any address within erase-suspended sectors produces sta-  
tus information on DQ7–DQ0. The system can use DQ7, or DQ6 and DQ2  
together, to determine if a sector is actively erasing or is erase-suspended. Refer  
to the Figure , “Write Operation Status,on page 81 for information on these sta-  
tus bits.  
After an erase-suspended program operation is complete, the bank returns to the  
erase-suspend-read mode. The system can determine the status of the program  
operation using the DQ7 or DQ6 status bits, just as in the standard program op-  
eration. Refer to the “Write Operation Status” section on page 81 for more  
information.  
In the erase-suspend-read mode, the system can also issue the autoselect com-  
mand sequence. Refer to the “Autoselect Mode” section on page 31 and  
“Autoselect Command Sequence” section on page 68 for details.  
73  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
To resume the sector erase operation, the system must write the Erase Resume  
command. The bank address of the erase-suspended bank is required when writ-  
ing this command. Further writes of the Resume command are ignored. Another  
Erase Suspend command can be written after the chip has resumed erasing.  
START  
Write Erase  
Command Sequence  
Data Poll  
from System  
Embedded  
Erase  
algorithm  
in progress  
No  
Data = FFh?  
Yes  
Erasure Completed  
Notes:  
1. See Table 18 for erase command sequence.  
2. See the section on DQ3 for information on the sector erase timer.  
Figure 5. Erase Operation  
Password Program Command  
The Password Program Command permits programming the password that is  
used as part of the hardware protection scheme. The actual password is 64-bits  
long. 4 Password Program commands are required to program the password.  
The user must enter the unlock cycle, password program command (38h) and  
the program address/data for each portion of the password when programming.  
There are no provisions for entering the 2-cycle unlock cycle, the password pro-  
gram command, and all the password data. There is no special addressing order  
required for programming the password. Also, when the password is undergoing  
programming, Simultaneous Operation is disabled. Read operations to any  
memory location will return the programming status except DQ7. Once pro-  
gramming is complete, the user must issue a SecSi™ Exit command to return  
the device to normal operation. Once the Password is written and verified, the  
Password Mode Locking Bit must be set in order to prevent verification. The  
Password Program Command is only capable of programming “0”s. Program-  
ming a “1” after a cell is programmed as a “0” results in a time-out by the  
Embedded Program Algorithm™ with the cell remaining as a “0. The password  
is all F’s when shipped from the factory. All 64-bit password combinations are  
valid as a password.  
Password Verify Command  
The Password Verify Command is used to verify the Password. The Password is  
verifiable only when the Password Mode Locking Bit is not programmed. If the  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
74  
Password Mode Locking Bit is programmed and the user attempts to verify the  
Password, the device will always drive all F’s onto the DQ data bus.  
Also, the device will not operate in Simultaneous Operation when the Password  
Verify command is executed. Only the password is returned regardless of the  
bank address. The lower two address bits (A1–A0) are valid during the Password  
Verify. Writing the SecSi™ Exit command returns the device back to normal  
operation.  
Password Protection Mode Locking Bit Program Command  
The Password Protection Mode Locking Bit Program Command programs the  
Password Protection Mode Locking Bit, which prevents further verifies or up-  
dates to the password. Once programmed, the Password Protection Mode  
Locking Bit cannot be erased and the Persistent Protection Mode Locking Bit pro-  
gram circuitry is disabled, thereby forcing the device to remain in the Password  
Protection Mode. After issuing “PL/68h” at the fourth bus cycle, the device re-  
quires a time out period of approximately 150 µs for programming the Password  
Protection Mode Locking Bit. Then by writing “PL/48h” at the fifth bus cycle, the  
device outputs verify data at DQ0. If DQ0 = 1, then the Password Protection  
Mode Locking Bit is programmed. If not, the system must repeat this program  
sequence from the fourth cycle of “PL/68h. Exiting the Password Protection  
Mode Locking Bit Program command is accomplished by writing the SecSi Sector  
command.  
Persistent Sector Protection Mode Locking Bit Program Command  
The Persistent Sector Protection Mode Locking Bit Program Command programs  
the Persistent Sector Protection Mode Locking Bit, which prevents the Password  
Mode Locking Bit from ever being programmed. By disabling the program cir-  
cuitry of the Password Mode Locking Bit, the device is forced to remain in the  
Persistent Sector Protection mode of operation, once this bit is set. After issuing  
“SMPL/68h” at the fourth bus cycle, the device requires a time out period of ap-  
proximately 150 µs for programming the Persistent Protect ion Mode Locking Bit.  
Then by writing “SMPL/48h” at the fifth bus cycle, the device outputs verify data  
at DQ0. If DQ0 = 1, then the Persistent Protection Mode Locking Bit is pro-  
grammed. If not, the system must repeat this program sequence from the  
fourth cycle of “PL/68h. Exiting the Persistent Protection Mode Locking Bit Pro-  
gram command is accomplished by writing the SecSi Sector Exit command.  
SecSi™ Sector Protection Bit Program Command  
To protect the SecSi Sector, write the SecSi Sector Protect command sequence  
while in the SecSi Sector mode. After issuing “OPBP/48h” at the fourth bus cycle,  
the device requires a time out period of approximately 150 µs to protect the SecSi  
Sector. Then, by writing “OPBP/48” at the fifth bus cycle, the device outputs verify  
data at DQ0. If DQ0 = 1, then the SecSi Sector is protected. If not, then the sys-  
tem must repeat this program sequence from the fourth cycle of “OPBP/48h.  
PPB Lock Bit Set Command  
The PPB Lock Bit Set command is used to set the PPB Lock bit if it is cleared ei-  
ther at reset or if the Password Unlock command was successfully executed.  
There is no PPB Lock Bit Clear command. Once the PPB Lock Bit is set, it cannot  
be cleared unless the device is taken through a power-on clear or the Password  
Unlock command is executed. Upon setting the PPB Lock Bit, the PPBs are  
latched into the DPBs. If the Password Mode Locking Bit is set, the PPB Lock Bit  
status is reflected as set, even after a power-on reset cycle. Exiting the PPB Lock  
75  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
Bit Set command is accomplished by writing the SecSi™ Exit command, only  
while in the Persistent Sector Protection Mode.  
DPB Write/Erase/Status Command  
The DPB Write command is used to set or clear a DPB for a given sector. The  
high order address bits (Amax–A11) are issued at the same time as the code  
01h or 00h on DQ7-DQ0. All other DQ data bus pins are ignored during the data  
write cycle. The DPBs are modifiable at any time, regardless of the state of the  
PPB or PPB Lock Bit. If the PPB is set, the sector is protected regardless of the  
value of the DPB. If the PPB is cleared, setting the DPB to a 1 protects the sector  
from programs or erases. Since this is a volatile bit, removing power or resetting  
the device will clear the DPBs. The programming of the DPB for a given sector  
can be verified by writing a DPB Status command to the device. Exiting the DPB  
Write/Erase command is accomplished by writing the Read/Reset command. Ex-  
iting the DPB Status command is accomplished by writing the SecSi™ Sector  
Exit command  
Password Unlock Command  
The Password Unlock command is used to clear the PPB Lock Bit so that the  
PPBs can be unlocked for modification, thereby allowing the PPBs to become ac-  
cessible for modification. The exact password must be entered in order for the  
unlocking function to occur. This command cannot be issued any faster than 2 µs  
at a time to prevent a hacker from running through the all 64-bit combinations  
in an attempt to correctly match a password. If the command is issued before  
the 2 µs execution window for each portion of the unlock, the command will be  
ignored.  
The Password Unlock function is accomplished by writing Password Unlock com-  
mand and data to the device to perform the clearing of the PPB Lock Bit. The  
password is 64 bits long, so the user must write the Password Unlock command  
4 times. A1 and A0 are used for matching. Writing the Password Unlock com-  
mand is not address order specific. The lower address A1–A0= 00, the next  
Password Unlock command is to A1–A0= 01, then to A1–A0= 10, and finally to  
A1–A0= 11.  
Once the Password Unlock command is entered for all four words, the RDY pin  
goes LOW indicating that the device is busy. Also, reading the Bank D results in  
the DQ6 pin toggling, indicating that the Password Unlock function is in  
progress. Reading the other bank returns actual array data. Approximately 1µs  
is required for each portion of the unlock. Once the first portion of the password  
unlock completes (RDY is not driven and DQ6 does not toggle when read), the  
Password Unlock command is issued again, only this time with the next part of  
the password. Four Password Unlock commands are required to successfully  
clear the PPB Lock Bit. As with the first Password Unlock command, the RDY sig-  
nal goes LOW and reading the device results in the DQ6 pin toggling on  
successive read operations until complete. It is the responsibility of the micro-  
processor to keep track of the number of Password Unlock commands, the order,  
and when to read the PPB Lock bit to confirm successful password unlock. In  
order to re lock the device into the Password Mode, the PPB Lock Bit Set com-  
mand can be re-issued.  
PPB Program Command  
The PPB Program command is used to program, or set, a given PPB. Each PPB is  
individually programmed (but is bulk erased with the other PPBs). The specific  
sector address (Amax–A12) are written at the same time as the program com-  
mand 60h with A6 = 0. If the PPB Lock Bit is set and the corresponding PPB is set  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
76  
for the sector, the PPB Program command will not execute and the command will  
time-out without programming the PPB.  
After programming a PPB, two additional cycles are needed to determine whether  
the PPB has been programmed with margin. After 4th cycle, the device requires  
approximately 150 µs time out period for programming the PPB. And then after  
5th cycle, the device outputs verify data at DQ0.  
The PPB Program command does not follow the Embedded Program algorithm.  
Writing the SecSi™ Sector Exit command returns the device back to normal  
operation.  
All PPB Erase Command  
The All PPB Erase command is used to erase all PPBs in bulk. There is no means  
for individually erasing a specific PPB. Unlike the PPB program, no specific sector  
address is required. However, when the PPB erase command is written (60h)  
and A6 = 1, all Sector PPBs are erased in parallel. If the PPB Lock Bit is set the  
ALL PPB Erase command will not execute and the command will time-out with-  
out erasing the PPBs.  
After erasing the PPBs, two additional cycles are needed to determine whether  
the PPB has been erased with margin. After 4th cycle, the device requires ap-  
proximately 1.5 ms time out period for erasing the PPB. And then after 5th  
cycle, the device outputs verify data at DQ0.  
It is the responsibility of the user to preprogram all PPBs prior to issuing the All  
PPB Erase command. If the user attempts to erase a cleared PPB, over-erasure  
may occur making it difficult to program the PPB at a later time. Also note that  
the total number of PPB program/erase cycles is limited to 100 cycles. Cycling  
the PPBs beyond 100 cycles is not guaranteed. Writing the SecSi™ Sector Exit  
command returns the device back to normal operation.  
PPB Status Command  
The programming of the PPB for a given sector can be verified by writing a PPB  
status verify command to the device.  
PPB Lock Bit Status Command  
The programming of the PPB Lock Bit for a given sector can be verified by writ-  
ing a PPB Lock Bit status verify command to the device.  
77  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
Command Definitions  
Table 18. Command Definitions  
Bus Cycles (Notes 1–6)  
Third Fourth Fifth  
Addr Data Addr Data Addr Data Addr Data Addr Data Addr Data Addr Data  
Command Sequence  
(Note 1)  
First  
Second  
Sixth  
Seventh  
Asynchronous Read (Note 7)  
Reset (Note 8)  
1
1
RA  
RD  
F0  
XXX  
(BA)  
555  
(BA)  
X00  
Manufacturer ID  
4
6
4
4
555  
555  
555  
555  
AA  
AA  
AA  
AA  
2AA  
2AA  
2AA  
2AA  
55  
55  
55  
55  
90  
90  
90  
90  
0001  
227E  
(BA)  
555  
(BA)  
X01  
(BA)X (Note (BA) (Not  
Device ID (Note 10)  
0E  
10)  
X0F e 10)  
(SA)  
555  
(SA) 0000/  
X02  
Sector Lock Verify  
(Note 11)  
0001  
(BA)  
555  
(BA)  
X03  
(Note  
12)  
Indicator Bits  
Program  
4
6
6
1
1
555  
555  
555  
BA  
AA  
AA  
AA  
B0  
30  
2AA  
2AA  
2AA  
55  
55  
55  
555  
555  
555  
A0  
80  
80  
PA  
Data  
AA  
Chip Erase  
555  
555  
2AA  
2AA  
55  
55  
555  
SA  
10  
30  
Sector Erase  
AA  
Erase Suspend (Note 15)  
Erase Resume (Note 16)  
BA  
(CR)  
555  
Set Configuration Register (Note 17)  
3
555  
AA  
2AA  
55  
C0  
20  
CFI Query (Note 18)  
1
55  
98  
Unlock Bypass Entry  
3
555  
AA  
2AA  
PA  
55  
PD  
555  
Unlock Bypass  
Program (Notes 13,  
14)  
2
XX  
A0  
Unlock Bypass  
Unlock  
Sector Erase (Notes  
2
2
2
XX  
XX  
XX  
80  
80  
90  
SA  
30  
Bypass  
13, 14)  
Mode  
Unlock Bypass Erase  
(Notes 13, 14)  
XXX 10  
XXX 00  
Unlock Bypass Reset  
(Notes 13, 14)  
Sector Protection Command Definitions  
SecSi™ Sector Entry  
3
4
555  
555  
AA  
AA  
2AA  
2AA  
55  
55  
555  
555  
88  
90  
SecSi™ Sector Exit  
SecSi™  
XX  
00  
68  
Sector  
SecSi™ Protection  
Bit Program (Notes  
19, 20, 22)  
RD  
(0)  
6
555  
AA  
2AA  
55  
555  
60  
OW  
OW  
48  
OW  
XX0  
XX1  
XX2  
XX3  
XX0  
XX1  
XX2  
XX3  
PD0  
PD1  
PD2  
PD3  
PD0  
PD1  
PD2  
PD3  
Password Program  
(Notes 19, 24)  
4
555  
AA  
2AA  
55  
555  
38  
Password  
Protection  
Password Verify  
4
7
555  
555  
AA  
AA  
2AA  
2AA  
55  
55  
555  
555  
C8  
28  
Password Unlock  
(Note 24)  
XX0  
PD0 XX1 PD1 XX2 PD2 XX3 PD3  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
78  
Bus Cycles (Notes 1–6)  
Third Fourth Fifth  
Addr Data Addr Data Addr Data Addr Data Addr Data Addr Data Addr Data  
Command Sequence  
(Note 1)  
First  
Second  
Sixth  
Seventh  
(SA)  
+ WP  
RD  
(0)  
PPB Program (Notes  
(SA)  
6
6
555  
555  
AA  
AA  
2AA  
2AA  
55  
55  
555  
555  
60  
60  
68  
60  
48  
40  
XX  
XX  
19, 20, 22)  
+ WP  
RD  
(0)  
PPB  
All PPB Erase (Notes  
Commands 19, 20, 23, 25)  
(SA)  
WP  
WP  
(SA)  
555  
(SA)  
X02  
RD  
(0)  
PPB Status (Note 26)  
4
3
4
555  
555  
555  
AA  
AA  
AA  
2AA  
2AA  
2AA  
55  
55  
55  
90  
78  
58  
PPB Lock Bit Set  
555  
PPB Lock  
Bit  
(BA)  
555  
RD  
(1)  
PPB Lock Bit Status  
(Note 20)  
BA  
DPB Write  
DPB Erase  
4
4
555  
555  
AA  
AA  
2AA  
2AA  
55  
55  
555  
555  
48  
48  
SA  
SA  
X1  
X0  
DPB  
(BA)  
555  
RD  
(0)  
DPB Status  
4
6
555  
555  
AA  
AA  
2AA  
2AA  
55  
55  
58  
60  
SA  
PL  
Password Protection Mode  
Locking Bit Program (Notes 19,  
20, 22)  
RD  
(0)  
555  
555  
68  
68  
PL  
SL  
48  
48  
PL  
SL  
Persistent Protection Mode  
Locking Bit Program (Notes 19,  
20, 22)  
RD  
(0)  
6
555  
AA  
2AA  
55  
60  
SL  
Legend:  
X = Don’t care  
RA = Address of the memory location to be read.  
RD = Data read from location RA during read operation.  
PA = Address of the memory location to be programmed. Addresses latch on the rising edge of the AVD# pulse or active edge of  
CLK which ever comes first.  
PD = Data to be programmed at location PA. Data latches on the rising edge of WE# or CE# pulse, whichever happens first.  
SA = Address of the sector to be verified (in autoselect mode) or erased. Address bits Amax–A12 uniquely select any sector.  
BA = Address of the bank (WS128J: A22, A21, A20, WS064J: A21, A20, A19) that is being switched to autoselect mode, is in  
bypass mode, or is being erased.  
SLA = Address of the sector to be locked. Set sector address (SA) and either A6 = 1 for unlocked or A6 = 0 for locked.  
CR = Configuration Register address bits A19–A12.  
OW = Address (A7–A0) is (00011010).  
PD3–PD0 = Password Data. PD3–PD0 present four 16 bit combinations that represent the 64-bit Password  
PWA = Password Address. Address bits A1 and A0 are used to select each 16-bit portion of the 64-bit entity.  
PWD = Password Data.  
PL = Address (A7-A0) is (00001010)  
RD(0) = DQ0 protection indicator bit. If protected, DQ0 = 1, if unprotected, DQ0 = 0.  
RD(1) = DQ1 protection indicator bit. If protected, DQ1 = 1, if unprotected, DQ1 = 0.  
SL = Address (A7-A0) is (00010010)  
WD= Write Data. See “Configuration Register” definition for specific write data  
WP = Address (A7-A0) is (00000010)  
Notes:  
1. See Table 1 for description of bus operations.  
2. All values are in hexadecimal.  
3. Except for the following, all bus cycles are write cycle: read cycle, fourth through sixth cycles of the Autoselect commands,  
fourth cycle of the configuration register verify and password verify commands, and any cycle reading at RD(0) and RD(1).  
4. Data bits DQ15–DQ8 are don’t care in command sequences, except for RD, PD, WD, PWD, and PD3-PD0.  
5. Unless otherwise noted, address bits Amax–A12 are don’t cares.  
79  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
6. Writing incorrect address and data values or writing them in the improper sequence may place the device in an unknown  
state. The system must write the reset command to return the device to reading array data.  
7. No unlock or command cycles required when bank is reading array data.  
8. The Reset command is required to return to reading array data (or to the erase-suspend-read mode if previously in Erase  
Suspend) when a bank is in the autoselect mode, or if DQ5 goes high (while the bank is providing status information) or  
performing sector lock/unlock.  
9. The fourth cycle of the autoselect command sequence is a read cycle. The system must provide the bank address. See the  
Autoselect Command Sequence section for more information.  
10. (BA)X0Fh = 2200h (WS128J), (BA)X0Eh = 2218h (WS128J), (BA)X0Fh = 221Eh (WS064J), (BA)X0Eh = 2201h (WS064J)  
11. The data is 0000h for an unlocked sector and 0001h for a locked sector  
12. DQ15 - DQ8 = 0, DQ7 - Factory Lock Bit (1 = Locked, 0 = Not Locked), DQ6 -Customer Lock Bit (1 = Locked, 0 = Not  
Locked), DQ5 = Handshake Bit (1 = Reserved, 0 = Standard Handshake)8, DQ4 & DQ3 - Boot Code (00= Dual Boot Sector,  
01= Top Boot Sector, 10= Bottom Boot Sector, 11=No Boot Sector), DQ2 - DQ0 = 001  
13. The Unlock Bypass command sequence is required prior to this command sequence.  
14. The Unlock Bypass Reset command is required to return to reading array data.  
15. The system may read and program in non-erasing sectors, or enter the autoselect mode, when in the Erase Suspend mode.  
The Erase Suspend command is valid only during a sector erase operation, and requires the bank address.  
16. The Erase Resume command is valid only during the Erase Suspend mode, and requires the bank address.  
17. See “Set Configuration Register Command Sequence” for details.  
18. Command is valid when device is ready to read array data or when device is in autoselect mode.  
19. The Reset command returns the device to reading the array.  
20. Regardless of CLK and AVD# interaction or Control Register bit 15 setting, command mode verifies are always asynchronous  
read operations.  
21. ACC must be at VHH during the entire operation of this command  
22. The fourth cycle programs the addressed locking bit. The fifth and sixth cycles are used to validate whether the bit has been  
fully programmed. If DQ0 (in the sixth cycle) reads 0, the program command must be issued and verified again.  
23. The fourth cycle erases all PPBs. The fifth and sixth cycles are used to validate whether the bits have been fully erased. If  
DQ0 (in the sixth cycle) reads 1, the erase command must be issued and verified again.  
24. The entire four bus-cycle sequence must be entered for each portion of the password.  
25. Before issuing the erase command, all PPBs should be programmed in order to prevent over-erasure of PPBs.  
26. In the fourth cycle, 01h indicates PPB set; 00h indicates PPB not set.  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
80  
Write Operation Status  
The device provides several bits to determine the status of a program or erase  
operation: DQ2, DQ3, DQ5, DQ6, and DQ7. Table 20, “Write Operation Status,”  
on page 87 and the following subsections describe the function of these bits. DQ7  
and DQ6 each offers a method for determining whether a program or erase op-  
eration is complete or in progress.  
DQ7: Data# Polling  
The Data# Polling bit, DQ7, indicates to the host system whether an Embedded  
Program or Erase algorithm is in progress or completed, or whether a bank is in  
Erase Suspend. Data# Polling is valid after the rising edge of the final WE# pulse  
in the command sequence.  
During the Embedded Program algorithm, the device outputs on DQ7 the com-  
plement of the datum programmed to DQ7. This DQ7 status also applies to  
programming during Erase Suspend. When the Embedded Program algorithm is  
complete, the device outputs the datum programmed to DQ7. The system must  
provide the program address to read valid status information on DQ7. If a pro-  
gram address falls within a protected sector, Data# Polling on DQ7 is active for  
approximately 1 µs, then that bank returns to the read mode.  
During the Embedded Erase algorithm, Data# Polling produces a “0” on DQ7.  
When the Embedded Erase algorithm is complete, or if the bank enters the Erase  
Suspend mode, Data# Polling produces a “1” on DQ7. The system must provide  
an address within any of the sectors selected for erasure to read valid status in-  
formation on DQ7.  
After an erase command sequence is written, if all sectors selected for erasing  
are protected, Data# Polling on DQ7 is active for approximately 100 µs, then the  
bank returns to the read mode. If not all selected sectors are protected, the Em-  
bedded Erase algorithm erases the unprotected sectors, and ignores the selected  
sectors that are protected. However, if the system reads DQ7 at an address within  
a protected sector, the status may not be valid.  
Just prior to the completion of an Embedded Program or Erase operation, DQ7  
may change asynchronously with DQ6–DQ0 while Output Enable (OE#) is as-  
serted low. That is, the device may change from providing status information to  
valid data on DQ7. Depending on when the system samples the DQ7 output, it  
may read the status or valid data. Even if the device has completed the program  
or erase operation and DQ7 has valid data, the data outputs on DQ6-DQ0 may  
be still invalid. Valid data on DQ7-D00 will appear on successive read cycles.  
Table 20, “Write Operation Status,on page 87 shows the outputs for Data# Poll-  
ing on DQ7. Figure 6, “Data# Polling Algorithm,on page 82 shows the Data#  
Polling  
algorithm.  
Figure 28,  
“Data#  
Polling  
Timings  
(During Embedded Algorithm),on page 107 in the AC Characteristics section  
shows the Data# Polling timing diagram.  
81  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
START  
Read DQ7–DQ0  
Addr = VA  
Yes  
DQ7 = Data?  
No  
No  
DQ5 = 1?  
Yes  
Read DQ7–DQ0  
Addr = VA  
Yes  
DQ7 = Data?  
No  
PASS  
FAIL  
Notes:  
1. VA = Valid address for programming. During a sector erase operation, a valid address is any sector address within  
the sector being erased. During chip erase, a valid address is any non-protected sector address.  
2. DQ7 should be rechecked even if DQ5 = “1” because DQ7 may change simultaneously with DQ5.  
Figure 6. Data# Polling Algorithm  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
82  
RDY: Ready  
The RDY is a dedicated output that, when the device is configured in the Synchro-  
nous mode, indicates (when at logic low) the system should wait 1 clock cycle  
before expecting the next word of data. The RDY pin is only controlled by CE#.  
Using the RDY Configuration Command Sequence, RDY can be set so that a logic  
low indicates the system should wait 2 clock cycles before expecting valid data.  
The following conditions cause the RDY output to be low: during the initial access  
(in burst mode), and after the boundary that occurs every 64 words beginning  
with the 64th address, 3Fh.  
When the device is configured in Asynchronous Mode, the RDY is an open-drain  
output pin which indicates whether an Embedded Algorithm is in progress or  
completed. The RDY status is valid after the rising edge of the final WE# pulse in  
the command sequence.  
If the output is low (Busy), the device is actively erasing or programming. (This  
includes programming in the Erase Suspend mode.) If the output is in high im-  
pedance (Ready), the device is in the read mode, the standby mode, or in the  
erase-suspend-read mode. Table 20, “Write Operation Status,on page 87 shows  
the outputs for RDY.  
DQ6: Toggle Bit I  
Toggle Bit I on DQ6 indicates whether an Embedded Program or Erase algorithm  
is in progress or complete, or whether the device has entered the Erase Suspend  
mode. Toggle Bit I may be read at any address in the same bank, and is valid  
after the rising edge of the final WE# pulse in the command sequence (prior to  
the program or erase operation), and during the sector erase time-out.  
During an Embedded Program or Erase algorithm operation, successive read cy-  
cles to any address cause DQ6 to toggle. When the operation is complete, DQ6  
stops toggling.  
After an erase command sequence is written, if all sectors selected for erasing  
are protected, DQ6 toggles for approximately 100 µs, then returns to reading  
array data. If not all selected sectors are protected, the Embedded Erase algo-  
rithm erases the unprotected sectors, and ignores the selected sectors that are  
protected.  
The system can use DQ6 and DQ2 together to determine whether a sector is ac-  
tively erasing or is erase-suspended. When the device is actively erasing (that is,  
the Embedded Erase algorithm is in progress), DQ6 toggles. When the device en-  
ters the Erase Suspend mode, DQ6 stops toggling. However, the system must  
also use DQ2 to determine which sectors are erasing or erase-suspended. Alter-  
natively, the system can use DQ7 (see the subsection on DQ7: Data# Polling).  
If a program address falls within a protected sector, DQ6 toggles for approxi-  
mately 1 ms after the program command sequence is written, then returns to  
reading array data.  
DQ6 also toggles during the erase-suspend-program mode, and stops toggling  
once the Embedded Program algorithm is complete.  
See the following for additional information: Figure 7, “Toggle Bit Algorithm,on  
page 84, “DQ6: Toggle Bit I” on page 83, Figure 29, “Toggle Bit Timings  
(During Embedded Algorithm),on page 107 (toggle bit timing diagram), and  
Table 19, “DQ6 and DQ2 Indications,on page 85.  
Toggle Bit I on DQ6 requires either OE# or CE# to be deasserteed and reasserted  
to show the change in state.  
83  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
START  
Read Byte  
(DQ0-DQ7)  
Address = VA  
Read Byte  
(DQ0-DQ7)  
Address = VA  
No  
DQ6 = Toggle?  
Yes  
No  
DQ5 = 1?  
Yes  
Read Byte Twice  
(DQ 0-DQ7)  
Adrdess = VA  
No  
DQ6 = Toggle?  
Yes  
FAIL  
PASS  
Note: The system should recheck the toggle bit even if DQ5 = “1” because the toggle bit may stop toggling as DQ5 changes to  
“1.” See the subsections on DQ6 and DQ2 for more information.  
Figure 7. Toggle Bit Algorithm  
DQ2: Toggle Bit II  
The “Toggle Bit II” on DQ2, when used with DQ6, indicates whether a particular  
sector is actively erasing (that is, the Embedded Erase algorithm is in progress),  
or whether that sector is erase-suspended. Toggle Bit II is valid after the rising  
edge of the final WE# pulse in the command sequence.  
DQ2 toggles when the system reads at addresses within those sectors that have  
been selected for erasure. But DQ2 cannot distinguish whether the sector is ac-  
tively erasing or is erase-suspended. DQ6, by comparison, indicates whether the  
device is actively erasing, or is in Erase Suspend, but cannot distinguish which  
sectors are selected for erasure. Thus, both status bits are required for sector and  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
84  
mode information. Refer to Table 19, “DQ6 and DQ2 Indications,on page 85 to  
compare outputs for DQ2 and DQ6.  
See the following for additional information: Figure 7, “Toggle Bit Algorithm,on  
page 84, “DQ6: Toggle Bit I” on page 83, Figure 29, “Toggle Bit Timings  
(During Embedded Algorithm),on page 107, and Table 19, “DQ6 and DQ2 Indi-  
cations,on page 85.  
Table 19. DQ6 and DQ2 Indications  
If device is  
and the system reads  
then DQ6  
and DQ2  
programming,  
at any address,  
toggles,  
does not toggle.  
at an address within a sector  
selected for erasure,  
toggles,  
toggles,  
also toggles.  
does not toggle.  
toggles.  
actively erasing,  
erase suspended,  
at an address within sectors not  
selected for erasure,  
at an address within a sector  
selected for erasure,  
does not toggle,  
returns array data,  
toggles,  
at an address within sectors not  
returns array data. The system can read  
from any sector not selected for erasure.  
selected for erasure,  
programming in  
erase suspend  
at any address,  
is not applicable.  
Reading Toggle Bits DQ6/DQ2  
Refer to Figure 7, “Toggle Bit Algorithm,on page 84 for the following discussion.  
Whenever the system initially begins reading toggle bit status, it must read DQ7–  
DQ0 at least twice in a row to determine whether a toggle bit is toggling. Typi-  
cally, the system would note and store the value of the toggle bit after the first  
read. After the second read, the system would compare the new value of the tog-  
gle bit with the first. If the toggle bit is not toggling, the device has completed  
the program or erase operation. The system can read array data on DQ7–DQ0 on  
the following read cycle.  
However, if after the initial two read cycles, the system determines that the toggle  
bit is still toggling, the system also should note whether the value of DQ5 is high  
(see the section on DQ5). If it is, the system should then determine again  
whether the toggle bit is toggling, since the toggle bit may have stopped toggling  
just as DQ5 went high. If the toggle bit is no longer toggling, the device has suc-  
cessfully completed the program or erase operation. If it is still toggling, the  
device did not completed the operation successfully, and the system must write  
the reset command to return to reading array data.  
The remaining scenario is that the system initially determines that the toggle bit  
is toggling and DQ5 has not gone high. The system may continue to monitor the  
toggle bit and DQ5 through successive read cycles, determining the status as de-  
scribed in the previous paragraph. Alternatively, it may choose to perform other  
system tasks. In this case, the system must start at the beginning of the algo-  
rithm when it returns to determine the status of the operation (Figure 7, “Toggle  
Bit Algorithm,on page 84).  
85  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
DQ5: Exceeded Timing Limits  
DQ5 indicates whether the program or erase time has exceeded a specified inter-  
nal pulse count limit. Under these conditions DQ5 produces a “1,indicating that  
the program or erase cycle was not successfully completed.  
The device may output a “1” on DQ5 if the system tries to program a “1” to a  
location that was previously programmed to “0.Only an erase operation can  
change a “0” back to a “1.Under this condition, the device halts the operation,  
and when the timing limit has been exceeded, DQ5 produces a “1.”  
Under both these conditions, the system must write the reset command to return  
to the read mode (or to the erase-suspend-read mode if a bank was previously  
in the erase-suspend-program mode).  
DQ3: Sector Erase Timer  
After writing a sector erase command sequence, the system may read DQ3 to de-  
termine whether or not erasure has begun. (The sector erase timer does not  
apply to the chip erase command.) If additional sectors are selected for erasure,  
the entire time-out also applies after each additional sector erase command.  
When the time-out period is complete, DQ3 switches from a “0” to a “1.If the  
time between additional sector erase commands from the system can be as-  
sumed to be less than 50 µs, the system need not monitor DQ3. See also “Sector  
Erase Command Sequence” on page 72.  
After the sector erase command is written, the system should read the status of  
DQ7 (Data# Polling) or DQ6 (Toggle Bit I) to ensure that the device has accepted  
the command sequence, and then read DQ3. If DQ3 is “1,the Embedded Erase  
algorithm has begun; all further commands (except Erase Suspend) are ignored  
until the erase operation is complete. If DQ3 is “0,the device will accept addi-  
tional sector erase commands. To ensure the command has been accepted, the  
system software should check the status of DQ3 prior to and following each sub-  
sequent sector erase command. If DQ3 is high on the second status check, the  
last command might not have been accepted.  
Table 20 shows the status of DQ3 relative to the other status bits.  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
86  
Table 20. Write Operation Status  
DQ7  
DQ5  
DQ2  
RDY  
Status  
(Note 2)  
DQ6  
(Note 1)  
DQ3  
N/A  
1
(Note 2)  
(Note 5)  
Embedded Program Algorithm  
No toggle  
(Note 6)  
DQ7#  
0
Toggle  
Toggle  
0
0
0
0
Standard  
Mode  
Embedded Erase Algorithm  
Erase  
Toggle  
Toggle  
No toggle  
(Note 6)  
High  
Impedance  
1
0
N/A  
Suspended Sector  
Erase-Suspend-  
Read (Note 4)  
Erase  
Suspend  
Mode  
Non-Erase  
Suspended Sector  
High  
Impedance  
Data  
Data  
Data  
0
Data  
N/A  
Data  
N/A  
Erase-Suspend-Program  
DQ7#  
Toggle  
0
Notes:  
1. DQ5 switches to ‘1’ when an Embedded Program or Embedded Erase operation has exceeded the maximum timing  
limits. Refer to the section on DQ5 for more information.  
2. DQ7 and DQ2 require a valid address when reading status information. Refer to the appropriate subsection for  
further details.  
3. When reading write operation status bits, the system must always provide the bank address where the Embedded  
Algorithm is in progress. The device outputs array data if the system addresses a non-busy bank.  
4. The system may read either asynchronously or synchronously (burst) while in erase suspend.  
5. The RDY pin acts a dedicated output to indicate the status of an embedded erase or program operation is in progress.  
This is available in the Asynchronous mode only.  
6. When the device is set to Asynchronous mode, these status flags should be read by CE# toggle.  
87  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
Absolute Maximum Ratings  
Storage Temperature, Plastic Packages ................................. –65°C to +150°C  
Ambient Temperature with Power Applied.............................. –65°C to +125°C  
Voltage with Respect to Ground:  
All Inputs and I/Os except as noted below (Note 1) ................ –0.5 V to VIO + 0.5 V  
VCC (Note 1)................................................................. –0.5 V to +2.5 V  
VIO ............................................................................. –0.5 V to +2.5 V  
A9, RESET#, ACC (Note 1) ............................................. –0.5 V to +12.5 V  
Output Short Circuit Current (Note 3) ................................... 100 mA  
Notes:  
1. Minimum DC voltage on input or I/Os is –0.5 V. During voltage transitions, inputs or I/Os may undershoot VSS to –  
2.0 V for periods of up to 20 ns. See Figure 8. Maximum DC voltage on input or I/Os is VCC + 0.5 V. During voltage  
transitions outputs may overshoot to VCC + 2.0 V for periods up to 20 ns. See Figure 9.  
2. No more than one output may be shorted to ground at a time. Duration of the short circuit should not be greater  
than one second.  
3. Stresses above those listed under “Absolute Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device. This is  
a stress rating only; functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions above those indicated in the  
operational sections of this data sheet is not implied. Exposure of the device to absolute maximum rating conditions  
for extended periods may affect device reliability.  
20 ns  
20 ns  
+0.8 V  
–0.5 V  
–2.0 V  
20 ns  
Figure 8. Maximum Negative Overshoot Waveform  
20 ns  
VCC  
+2.0 V  
VCC  
+0.5 V  
1.0 V  
20 ns  
20 ns  
Figure 9. Maximum Positive Overshoot Waveform  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
88  
Operating Ranges  
Commercial (C) Devices  
Ambient Temperature (TA)0°C to +70°C  
Industrial (I) Devices  
Ambient Temperature (TA)................................................... –40°C to +85°C  
Supply Voltages  
VCC Supply Voltages........................................................... +1.65 V to +1.95 V  
VIO Supply Voltages: .......................................................... +1.65 V to +1.95 V  
VCC >= VIO - 100mV  
Operating ranges define those limits between which the functionality of the device is guaranteed.  
89  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
DC Characteristics  
CMOS Compatible  
Parameter  
Description  
Test Conditions Notes: 1 & 2  
VIN = VSS to VCC, VCC = VCCmax  
VOUT = VSS to VCC, VCC = VCCmax  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
±1  
±1  
30  
Unit  
µA  
ILI  
Input Load Current  
ILO  
Output Leakage Current  
µA  
CE# = VIL, OE# = VIH  
,
66 MHz  
80 MHz  
66 MHz  
80 MHz  
66 MHz  
80 MHz  
15  
18  
15  
18  
15  
18  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
WE# = VIH, burst length =  
8
36  
CE# = VIL, OE# = VIH  
,
30  
WE# = VIH, burst length =  
16  
36  
ICCB  
VCC Active burst Read Current  
CE# = VIL, OE# = VIH  
,
30  
WE# = VIH, burst length =  
Continuous  
36  
CE# = VIL, OE# = VIH, WE# = VIH  
burst length = 8  
,
50  
200  
µA  
IIO1  
VIO Non-active Output  
OE# = VIH  
0.2  
20  
12  
3.5  
15  
0.2  
0.2  
22  
25  
0.2  
7
10  
30  
µA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
µA  
10 MHz  
5 MHz  
1 MHz  
VCC Active Asynchronous Read Current  
(Note 3)  
CE# = VIL, OE# = VIH  
WE# = VIH  
,
ICC1  
16  
5
ICC2  
ICC3  
ICC4  
VCC Active Write Current (Note 4)  
VCC Standby Current (Note 5)  
VCC Reset Current  
CE# = VIL, OE# = VIH, ACC = VIH  
CE# = RESET# = VCC ± 0.2 V  
RESET# = VIL, CLK = VIL  
40  
50  
50  
µA  
66 MHz  
54  
mA  
mA  
µA  
VCC Active Current  
(Read While Write)  
ICC5  
ICC6  
IACC  
CE# = VIL, OE# = VIH  
CE# = VIL, OE# = VIH  
80 MHz  
60  
VCC Sleep Current  
50  
VACC  
VCC  
15  
mA  
mA  
V
Accelerated Program Current  
(Note 6)  
CE# = VIL, OE# = VIH,  
VACC = 12.0 ± 0.5 V  
5
10  
VIL  
VIH  
VOL  
VOH  
Input Low Voltage  
Input High Voltage  
Output Low Voltage  
Output High Voltage  
VIO = 1.8 V  
VIO = 1.8 V  
–0.5  
0.4  
VIO + 0.4  
0.1  
VIO – 0.4  
IOL = 100 µA, VCC = VCC min = VIO  
IOH = –100 µA, VCC = VCC min = VIO  
V
V
VIO – 0.1  
11.5  
Voltage for Autoselect and Temporary  
Sector Unprotect  
VID  
VCC = 1.8 V  
12.5  
V
VHH  
Voltage for Accelerated Program  
Low VCC Lock-out Voltage  
11.5  
1.0  
12.5  
1.4  
V
V
VLKO  
Notes:  
1. Maximum ICC specifications are tested with VCC = VCCmax.  
2. VCC= VIO  
3. The ICC current listed is typically less than 2 mA/MHz, with OE# at VIH  
.
4. ICC active while Embedded Erase or Embedded Program is in progress.  
5. Device enters automatic sleep mode when addresses are stable for tACC + 60 ns. Typical sleep mode current is equal  
to ICC3  
6. Total current during accelerated programming is the sum of VACC and VCC currents.  
.
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
90  
Test Conditions  
Device  
Under  
Test  
C
L
Figure 10. Test Setup  
Table 21. Test Specifications  
Test Condition  
All Speed Options  
Unit  
Output Load Capacitance, CL  
(including jig capacitance)  
30  
pF  
Input Rise and Fall Times  
2.5 - 3  
0.0–VIO  
VIO/2  
ns  
V
Input Pulse Levels  
Input timing measurement reference levels  
Output timing measurement reference levels  
V
VIO/2  
V
Key to Switching Waveforms  
WAVEFORM  
INPUTS  
OUTPUTS  
Steady  
Changing from H to L  
Changing from L to H  
Don’t Care, Any Change Permitted  
Does Not Apply  
Changing, State Unknown  
Center Line is High Impedance State (High Z)  
Switching Waveforms  
VIO  
All Inputs and Outputs  
VIO/2  
VIO/2  
Input  
Measurement Level  
Output  
0.0 V  
Figure 11. Input Waveforms and Measurement Levels  
91  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
AC Characteristics  
VCC Power-up  
Parameter  
tVCS  
Description  
VCC Setup Time  
VIO Setup Time  
Test Setup  
Min  
Speed  
50  
Unit  
µs  
tVIOS  
Min  
50  
µs  
tRSTH  
Notes:  
RESET# Low Hold Time  
Min  
50  
µs  
1. VCC >= VIO - 100mV and VCC ramp rate is > 1V / 100µs  
2. VCC ramp rate <1V / 100µs, a Hardware Reset will be required.  
tVCS  
VCC  
tVIOS  
VIO  
RESET#  
Figure 12.  
V
Power-up Diagram  
CC  
CLK Characterization  
Parameter  
Description  
66 MHz  
66  
80 MHz  
80  
Unit  
fCLK  
tCLK  
tCKH  
tCKL  
tCR  
CLK Frequency  
Max  
Min  
MHz  
ns  
CLK Period  
15  
12.5  
CLK High Time  
CLK Low Time  
CLK Rise Time  
CLK Fall Time  
Min  
7.0  
3
5
ns  
ns  
Max  
2.5  
tCF  
t
CLK  
t
t
CL  
CH  
CLK  
t
t
CF  
CR  
Figure 13. CLK Characterization  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
92  
AC Characteristics  
Synchronous/Burst Read @ VIO = 1.8 V  
Parameter  
JEDEC Standard Description  
66 MHz 80 MHz Unit  
Latency (Standard wait-state Handshake mode) for 8-Word  
and 16-Word Burst  
tIACC  
Max  
Max  
56  
46  
ns  
ns  
Latency (Standard wait-state Handshake mode) for 32-  
Word and Continuous Burst  
tIACC  
71  
58.5  
9.1  
tBACC  
tACS  
tACH  
tBDH  
tCR  
Burst Access Time Valid Clock to Output Delay  
Address Setup Time to CLK (Note 1)  
Address Hold Time from CLK (Note 1)  
Data Hold Time from Next Clock Cycle  
Chip Enable to RDY Valid  
Output Enable to Output Valid  
Chip Enable to High Z  
Max  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Max  
Max  
Max  
Max  
Min  
Min  
Max  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Max  
Max  
Max  
Min  
11.2  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
4
5.5  
2
11.2  
11.2  
9.1  
9.1  
tOE  
tCEZ  
tOEZ  
tCES  
tRDYS  
tRACC  
tAAS  
tAAH  
tCAS  
tAVC  
tAVD  
tACC  
tCKA  
tCKZ  
tOES  
8
8
4
4
Output Enable to High Z  
CE# Setup Time to CLK  
RDY Setup Time to CLK  
Ready Access Time from CLK  
Address Setup Time to AVD# (Note 1)  
Address Hold Time to AVD# (Note 1)  
CE# Setup Time to AVD#  
AVD# Low to CLK  
11.2  
9.1  
4
5.5  
0
4
AVD# Pulse  
10  
Access Time  
55  
45  
CLK to access resume  
11.2  
9.1  
CLK to High Z  
8
4
Output Enable Setup Time  
Note:  
1. Addresses are latched on the first of either the active edge of CLK or the rising edge of AVD#.  
93  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
AC CHaracteristics  
tCEZ  
tCES  
7 cycles for initial access shown.  
CE#  
CLK  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
tAVC  
AVD#  
tAVD  
tACS  
tBDH  
Addresses  
Data  
Aa  
tBACC  
tACH  
Hi-Z  
tIACC  
tACC  
Da  
Da + 1  
Da + n  
tOEZ  
OE#  
RDY  
tCR  
tRACC  
tOE  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
tRDYS  
Notes:  
1. Figure shows total number of wait states set to seven cycles. The total number of wait states can be programmed  
from two cycles to seven cycles.  
2. If any burst address occurs at a 64-word boundary, two additional clock cycle are inserted, and is indicated by RDY.  
3. The device is in synchronous mode.  
Figure 14. CLK Synchronous Burst Mode Read (rising active CLK)  
tCEZ  
4 cycles for initial access shown.  
tCES  
CE#  
1
2
3
4
5
CLK  
tAVC  
AVD#  
tAVD  
tACS  
tBDH  
Aa  
Addresses  
Data  
tBACC  
tACH  
Hi-Z  
tIACC  
Da  
Da + 1  
Da + n  
tACC  
tOEZ  
OE#  
RDY  
tRACC  
tOE  
tCR  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
tRDYS  
Notes:  
1. Figure shows total number of wait states set to four cycles. The total number of wait states can be programmed from  
two cycles to seven cycles. Clock is set for active falling edge.  
2. If any burst address occurs at a 64-word boundary, two additional clock cycle are inserted, and is indicated by RDY.  
3. The device is in synchronous mode.  
Figure 15. CLK Synchronous Burst Mode Read (Falling Active Clock)  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
94  
AC Characteristics  
tCEZ  
7 cycles for initial access shown.  
tCAS  
CE#  
CLK  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
tAVC  
AVD#  
tAVD  
tAAS  
Addresses  
Data  
Aa  
tBACC  
tAAH  
Hi-Z  
tIACC  
Da  
Da + 1  
Da + n  
tACC  
tBDH  
tOEZ  
OE#  
RDY  
tRACC  
tCR  
tOE  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
tRDYS  
Notes:  
1. Figure shows total number of wait states set to seven cycles. The total number of wait states can be programmed  
from two cycles to seven cycles. Clock is set for active rising edge.  
2. If any burst address occurs at a 64-word boundary, two additional clock cycle are inserted, and is indicated by RDY.  
3. The device is in synchronous mode.  
Figure 16. Synchronous Burst Mode Read  
7 cycles for initial access shown.  
tCES  
CE#  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CLK  
tAVC  
AVD#  
tAVD  
tACS  
AC  
Addresses  
Data  
tBACC  
tACH  
tIACC  
DC  
DD  
DE  
DF  
D8  
DB  
tBDH  
OE#  
RDY  
tCR  
tRACC  
tOE  
tRACC  
Hi-Z  
tRDYS  
Notes:  
1. Figure shows total number of wait states set to seven cycles. The total number of wait states can be programmed  
from two cycles to seven cycles. Clock is set for active rising edge.  
2. If any burst address occurs at a 64-word boundary, two additional clock cycle are inserted, and is indicated by RDY.  
3. The device is in synchronous mode with wrap around.  
4. D0-D7 in data waveform indicates the order the data within a given 8-word address range, from lowest to highest.  
Starting address in figure is the 4th address in range (AC)  
Figure 17. 8-word Linear Burst with Wrap Around  
95  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
AC Characteristics  
tCEZ  
6 wait cycles for initial access shown.  
tCES  
CE#  
1
2
3
4
5
6
CLK  
tAVC  
AVD#  
tAVD  
tACS  
Aa  
Addresses  
Data  
tBACC  
tACH  
Hi-Z  
tIACC  
Da  
Da+1  
Da+2  
Da+3  
Da + n  
tBDH  
tOEZ  
tRACC  
OE#  
RDY  
tCR  
tOE  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
tRDYS  
Notes:  
1. Figure assumes 6 wait states for initial access and synchronous read.  
2. The Set Configuration Register command sequence has been written with A18=0; device will output RDY one cycle  
before valid data.  
Figure 18. Linear Burst with RDY Set One Cycle Before Data  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
96  
AC Characteristics  
Asynchronous Mode Read @ VIO = 1.8 V  
Parameter  
66  
80  
JEDEC Standard Description  
MHz  
MHz  
Unit  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tCE  
tACC  
Access Time from CE# Low  
Max  
Max  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Max  
Min  
Min  
Max  
Min  
55  
55  
45  
45  
Asynchronous Access Time (Note 1)  
AVD# Low Time  
tAVDP  
tAAVDS  
tAAVDH  
tOE  
10  
4
Address Setup Time to Rising Edge of AVD  
Address Hold Time from Rising Edge of AVD  
Output Enable to Output Valid  
5.5  
11.2  
9.1  
Read  
0
8
8
0
tOEH  
Output Enable Hold Time  
Toggle and Data# Polling  
tOEZ  
tCAS  
Output Enable to High Z (Note 2)  
CE# Setup Time to AVD#  
Notes:  
1. Asynchronous Access Time is from the last of either stable addresses or the falling edge of AVD#.  
2. Not 100% tested.  
97  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
AC Characteristics  
CE#  
tOE  
OE#  
tOEH  
WE#  
Data  
tCE  
tOEZ  
Valid RD  
tACC  
RA  
Addresses  
AVD#  
tAAVDH  
tCAS  
tAVDP  
tAAVDS  
Note: RA = Read Address, RD = Read Data.  
Figure 19. Asynchronous Mode Read with Latched Addresses  
CE#  
OE#  
tOE  
tOEH  
WE#  
Data  
tCE  
tOEZ  
Valid RD  
tACC  
RA  
Addresses  
AVD#  
Note: RA = Read Address, RD = Read Data.  
Figure 20. Asynchronous Mode Read  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
98  
AC Characteristics  
Hardware Reset (RESET#)  
Parameter  
All Speed  
Options  
JEDEC  
Std  
Description  
Unit  
RESET# Pin Low (During Embedded Algorithms)  
to Read Mode (See Note)  
tReady  
Max  
Max  
35  
µs  
RESET# Pin Low (NOT During Embedded Algorithms)  
to Read Mode (See Note)  
tReady  
500  
ns  
tRP  
tRH  
RESET# Pulse Width  
Min  
Min  
Min  
500  
200  
20  
ns  
ns  
µs  
Reset High Time Before Read (See Note)  
RESET# Low to Standby Mode  
tRPD  
Note: Not 100% tested.  
CE#, OE#  
tRH  
RESET#  
tRP  
tReady  
Reset Timings NOT during Embedded Algorithms  
Reset Timings during Embedded Algorithms  
CE#, OE#  
RESET#  
tReady  
tRP  
Figure 21. Reset Timings  
99  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
AC Characteristics  
Erase/Program Operations @ VIO = 1.8 V  
Parameter  
JEDEC Standard Description  
66 MHz 80 MHz Unit  
tAVAV  
tWC  
Write Cycle Time (Note 1)  
Min  
Min  
45  
4
ns  
Synchronous  
Asynchronous  
Synchronous  
Asynchronous  
Address Setup Time (Notes  
2, 3)  
tAVWL  
tAS  
ns  
0
5.5  
15  
10  
20  
0
Address Hold Time (Notes  
2, 3)  
tWLAX  
tAH  
Min  
ns  
tAVDP  
tDS  
AVD# Low Time  
Data Setup Time  
Data Hold Time  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Typ  
Typ  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
µs  
µs  
tDVWH  
tWHDX  
tGHWL  
tDH  
tGHWL  
tCAS  
tCH  
Read Recovery Time Before Write  
CE# Setup Time to AVD#  
CE# Hold Time  
0
0
0
tWHEH  
tWLWH  
tWHWL  
tWP  
Write Pulse Width  
20  
20  
0
tWPH  
tSR/W  
Write Pulse Width High  
Latency Between Read and Write Operations  
tWHWH1  
tWHWH1  
tWHWH1 Programming Operation (Note 4)  
<7  
<4  
<0.2  
<104  
500  
1
tWHWH1 Accelerated Programming Operation (Note 4)  
Sector Erase Operation (Notes 4, 5)  
tWHWH2  
tWHWH2  
Typ  
sec  
Chip Erase Operation (Notes 4, 5)  
tVID  
tVIDS  
tVCS  
VACC Rise and Fall Time  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
ns  
µs  
µs  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
VACC Setup Time (During Accelerated Programming)  
VCC Setup Time  
50  
0
tELWL  
tCS  
CE# Setup Time to WE#  
AVD# Setup Time to WE#  
AVD# Hold Time to WE#  
AVD# Hold Time to CLK  
tAVSW  
tAVHW  
tAVHC  
tCSW  
4
4
4
Clock Setup Time to WE#  
5
Notes:  
1. Not 100% tested.  
2. Asynchronous mode allows both Asynchronous and Synchronous program operation. Synchronous mode allows both  
Asynchronous and Synchronous program operation.  
3. In asynchronous program operation timing, addresses are latched on the falling edge of WE# or rising edge of AVD#.  
In synchronous program operation timing, addresses are latched on the first of either the rising edge of AVD# or the  
active edge of CLK.  
4. See the “Erase and Programming Performance” section for more information.  
5. Does not include the preprogramming time.  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
100  
AC Characteristics  
Program Command Sequence (last two cycles)  
Read Status Data  
V
IH  
CLK  
V
IL  
tAVDP  
AVD#  
tAH  
tAS  
PA  
VA  
VA  
Addresses  
Data  
555h  
In  
Complete  
A0h  
PD  
tDS  
tDH  
Progress  
CE#  
tCH  
OE#  
WE#  
tWP  
tWHWH1  
tCS  
tWPH  
tWC  
tVCS  
VCC  
Notes:  
1. PA = Program Address, PD = Program Data, VA = Valid Address for reading status bits.  
2. “In progress” and “complete” refer to status of program operation.  
3. A22–A12 are don’t care during command sequence unlock cycles.  
4. CLK can be either VIL or VIH  
.
5. The Asynchronous programming operation is independent of the Set Device Read Mode bit in the Configuration Reg-  
ister.  
Figure 22. Asynchronous Program Operation Timings: AVD# Latched Addresses  
101  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
AC Characteristics  
Program Command Sequence (last two cycles)  
Read Status Data  
CLK  
tACS  
tCSW  
AVD#  
tAVDP  
Addresses  
555h  
PA  
VA  
VA  
In  
Data  
tCAS  
Complete  
A0h  
PD  
tDS  
tDH  
Progress  
tAVSW  
CE#  
tCH  
OE#  
tAH  
tWP  
WE#  
tWHWH1  
tWPH  
tWC  
tVCS  
VCC  
Notes:  
1. PA = Program Address, PD = Program Data, VA = Valid Address for reading status bits.  
2. “In progress” and “complete” refer to status of program operation.  
3. A22–A12 are don’t care during command sequence unlock cycles.  
4. CLK can be either VIL or VIH  
.
5. The Asynchronous programming operation is independent of the Set Device Read Mode bit in the Configuration Reg-  
ister.  
Figure 23. Asynchronous Program Operation Timings: WE# Latched Addresses  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
102  
AC Characteristics  
Program Command Sequence (last two cycles)  
tAVCH  
Read Status Data  
CLK  
tACS  
tCSW  
AVD#  
tAVDP  
Addresses  
555h  
PA  
VA  
VA  
In  
Data  
tCAS  
Complete  
A0h  
PD  
tDS  
tDH  
Progress  
tAVSW  
CE#  
tCH  
OE#  
tAH  
tWP  
WE#  
tWHWH1  
tWPH  
tWC  
tVCS  
VCC  
Notes:  
1. PA = Program Address, PD = Program Data, VA = Valid Address for reading status bits.  
2. “In progress” and “complete” refer to status of program operation.  
3. A22–A12 are don’t care during command sequence unlock cycles.  
4. Addresses are latched on the first of either the rising edge of AVD# or the active edge of CLK.  
5. Either CE# or AVD# is required to go from low to high in between programming command sequences.  
6. The Synchronous programming operation is dependent of the Set Device Read Mode bit in the Configuration Register.  
The Configuration Register must be set to the Synchronous Read Mode.  
Figure 24. Synchronous Program Operation Timings: WE# Latched Addresses  
103  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
AC Characteristics  
Program Command Sequence (last two cycles)  
tAVCH  
Read Status Data  
CLK  
tAS  
tAH  
tAVSC  
AVD#  
tAVDP  
Addresses  
555h  
PA  
VA  
VA  
In  
Data  
Complete  
A0h  
PD  
tDS  
tDH  
Progress  
tCAS  
CE#  
tCH  
OE#  
WE#  
tCSW  
tWP  
tWHWH1  
tWPH  
tWC  
tVCS  
VCC  
Notes:  
1. PA = Program Address, PD = Program Data, VA = Valid Address for reading status bits.  
2. “In progress” and “complete” refer to status of program operation.  
3. A22–A12 are don’t care during command sequence unlock cycles.  
4. Addresses are latched on the first of either the rising edge of AVD# or the active edge of CLK.  
5. Either CE# or AVD# is required to go from low to high in between programming command sequences.  
6. The Synchronous programming operation is dependent of the Set Device Read Mode bit in the Configuration Register.  
The Configuration Register must be set to the Synchronous Read Mode.  
Figure 25. Synchronous Program Operation Timings: CLK Latched Addresses  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
104  
AC Characteristics  
Erase Command Sequence (last two cycles)  
Read Status Data  
V
IH  
CLK  
V
IL  
tAVDP  
AVD#  
tAH  
tAS  
SA  
555h for  
chip erase  
VA  
VA  
Addresses  
Data  
2AAh  
10h for  
chip erase  
In  
Complete  
55h  
30h  
Progress  
tDS  
tDH  
CE#  
tCH  
OE#  
WE#  
tWP  
tWHWH2  
tCS  
tWPH  
tWC  
tVCS  
VCC  
Figure 26. Chip/Sector Erase Command Sequence  
Notes:  
1. SA is the sector address for Sector Erase.  
2. Address bits A22–A12 are don’t cares during unlock cycles in the command sequence.  
105  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
AC Characteristics  
CE#  
AVD#  
WE#  
Addresses  
Data  
PA  
Don't Care  
A0h  
Don't Care  
PD  
Don't Care  
OE#  
tVIDS  
1 µs  
V
V
ID  
ACC  
tVID  
or V  
IL  
IH  
Note: Use setup and hold times from conventional program operation.  
Figure 27. Accelerated Unlock Bypass Programming Timing  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
106  
AC Characteristics  
AVD#  
tCEZ  
tCE  
CE#  
tOEZ  
tCH  
tOE  
OE#  
tOEH  
WE#  
tACC  
VA  
Addresses  
VA  
Status Data  
Status Data  
Data  
Notes:  
1. Status reads in figure are shown as asynchronous.  
2. VA = Valid Address. Two read cycles are required to determine status. When the Embedded Algorithm operation is  
complete, and Data# Polling will output true data.  
3. While in Asynchronous mode, RDY will be low while the device is in embedded erase or programming mode.  
Figure 28. Data# Polling Timings (During Embedded Algorithm)  
AVD#  
tCEZ  
tCE  
CE#  
tOEZ  
tCH  
tOE  
OE#  
WE#  
tOEH  
tACC  
Addresses  
Data  
VA  
VA  
Status Data  
Status Data  
Notes:  
1. Status reads in figure are shown as asynchronous.  
2. VA = Valid Address. Two read cycles are required to determine status. When the Embedded Algorithm operation is  
complete, the toggle bits will stop toggling.  
3. While in Asynchronous mode, RDY will be low while the device is in embedded erase or programming mode.  
Figure 29. Toggle Bit Timings (During Embedded Algorithm)  
107  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
AC Characteristics  
CE#  
CLK  
AVD#  
Addresses  
OE#  
VA  
VA  
tIACC  
tIACC  
Data  
Status Data  
Status Data  
RDY  
Notes:  
1. The timings are similar to synchronous read timings.  
2. VA = Valid Address. Two read cycles are required to determine status. When the Embedded Algorithm operation is  
complete, the toggle bits will stop toggling.  
3. RDY is active with data (A18 = 0 in the Configuration Register). When A18 = 1 in the Configuration Register, RDY is  
active one clock cycle before data.  
Figure 30. Synchronous Data Polling Timings/Toggle Bit Timings  
Enter  
Embedded  
Erasing  
Erase  
Suspend  
Enter Erase  
Suspend Program  
Erase  
Resume  
Erase  
Erase Suspend  
Read  
Erase  
Erase  
WE#  
Erase  
Erase Suspend  
Suspend  
Program  
Complete  
Read  
DQ6  
DQ2  
Note: DQ2 toggles only when read at an address within an erase-suspended sector. The system may use OE# or CE#  
to toggle DQ2 and DQ6.  
Figure 31. DQ2 vs. DQ6  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
108  
AC Characteristics  
Temporary Sector Unprotect  
Parameter  
JEDEC  
Std  
tVIDR  
tVHH  
Description  
All Speed Options  
Unit  
ns  
VID Rise and Fall Time (See Note)  
VHH Rise and Fall Time (See Note)  
Min  
Min  
500  
250  
ns  
RESET# Setup Time for Temporary Sector  
Unprotect  
tRSP  
Min  
Min  
4
4
µs  
µs  
RESET# Hold Time from RDY High for  
Temporary Sector Unprotect  
tRRB  
Note: Not 100% tested.  
VID  
VID  
RESET#  
VIL or VIH  
VIL or VIH  
tVIDR  
tVIDR  
Program or Erase Command Sequence  
CE#  
WE#  
RDY  
tRRB  
tRSP  
Figure 32. Temporary Sector Unprotect Timing Diagram  
109  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
AC Characteristics  
V
ID  
V
IH  
RESET#  
SA, A6,  
A1, A0  
Valid*  
Valid*  
Valid*  
Status  
Sector Protect/Unprotect  
Verify  
40h  
Data  
60h  
60h  
Sector Protect: 150 µs  
Sector Unprotect: 1.5 ms  
1 µs  
CE#  
WE#  
OE#  
* For sector protect, A6 = 0, A1 = 1, A0 = 0. For sector unprotect, A6 = 1, A1 = 1, A0 = 0.  
Figure 33. Sector/Sector Block Protect and Unprotect Timing Diagram  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
110  
AC Characteristics  
Address boundary occurs every 64 words, beginning at address  
00003Fh: 00007Fh, 0000BFh, etc. Address 000000h is also a boundary crossing.  
C60  
C61  
3D  
C62  
3E  
C63  
3F  
C63  
3F  
C63  
3F  
C64  
40  
C65  
41  
C66  
42  
C67  
43  
CLK  
3C  
Address (hex)  
(stays high)  
AVD#  
RDY  
RDY  
tRACC  
tRACC  
(Note 1)  
(Note 2)  
latency  
tRACC  
tRACC  
latency  
Data  
D60  
D61  
D62  
D63  
D64  
D65  
D66  
D67  
Notes:  
1. RDY active with data (A18 = 0 in the Configuration Register).  
2. RDY active one clock cycle before data (A18 = 1 in the Configuration Register).  
3. Cxx indicates the clock that triggers Dxx on the outputs; for example, C60 triggers D60. Figure shows the device not  
crossing a bank in the process of performing an erase or program.  
4. If the starting address latched in is either 3Eh or 3Fh (or some 64 multiple of either), there is no additional 2 cycle  
latency at the boundary crossing.  
Figure 34. Latency with Boundary Crossing  
111  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
AC Characteristics  
Address boundary occurs every 64 words, beginning at address  
00003Fh: 00007Fh, 0000BFh, etc. Address 000000h is also a boundary crossing.  
C60  
C61  
3D  
C62  
3E  
C63  
3F  
C63  
3F  
C63  
3F  
C64  
40  
CLK  
3C  
Address (hex)  
(stays high)  
AVD#  
RDY  
RDY  
tRACC  
tRACC  
(Note 1)  
(Note 2)  
latency  
tRACC  
tRACC  
latency  
Data  
Invalid  
D60  
D61  
D62  
D63  
Read Status  
OE#,  
CE#  
(stays low)  
Notes:  
1. RDY active with data (A18 = 0 in the Configuration Register).  
2. RDY active one clock cycle before data (A18 = 1 in the Configuration Register).  
3. Cxx indicates the clock that triggers Dxx on the outputs; for example, C60 triggers D60. Figure shows the device  
crossing a bank in the process of performing an erase or program.  
Figure 35. Latency with Boundary Crossing into Program/Erase Bank  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
112  
AC Characteristics  
Data  
D0  
D1  
Rising edge of next clock cycle  
following last wait state triggers  
next burst data  
AVD#  
OE#  
total number of clock cycles  
following addresses being latched  
1
2
0
3
1
4
5
6
4
7
5
CLK  
2
3
number of clock cycles  
programmed  
Wait State Decoding Addresses:  
A14, A13, A12 = “111” Reserved  
A14, A13, A12 = “110” Reserved  
A14, A13, A12 = “101” 5 programmed, 7 total  
A14, A13, A12 = “100” 4 programmed, 6 total  
A14, A13, A12 = “011” 3 programmed, 5 total  
A14, A13, A12 = “010” 2 programmed, 4 total  
A14, A13, A12 = “001” 1 programmed, 3 total  
A14, A13, A12 = “000” 0 programmed, 2 total  
Note: Figure assumes address D0 is not at an address boundary, active clock edge is rising, and wait state is set to “101”.  
Figure 36. Example of Wait States Insertion  
113  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
AC Characteristics  
Last Cycle in  
Program or  
Sector Erase  
Read status (at least two cycles) in same bank  
and/or array data from other bank  
Begin another  
write or program  
command sequence  
Command Sequence  
tWC  
tRC  
tRC  
tWC  
CE#  
OE#  
tOE  
tOEH  
tGHWL  
WE#  
Data  
tWPH  
tOEZ  
tWP  
tDS  
tACC  
tOEH  
tDH  
PD/30h  
RD  
RD  
AAh  
tSR/W  
RA  
Addresses  
AVD#  
PA/SA  
tAS  
RA  
555h  
tAH  
Note: Breakpoints in waveforms indicate that system may alternately read array data from the “non-busy bank” while checking the  
status of the program or erase operation in the “busy” bank. The system should read status twice to ensure valid information.  
Figure 37. Back-to-Back Read/Write Cycle Timings  
May 5, 2004  
S29WS128/064J  
114  
Erase and Programming Performance  
Parameter  
Typ (Note 1)  
Max (Note 2)  
Unit  
Comments  
32 Kword  
4 Kword  
128J  
<0.4  
<2  
<2  
Sector Erase Time  
s
<0.2  
Excludes 00h programming  
prior to erasure (Note 4)  
<103  
Chip Erase Time  
s
064J  
<53  
Excludes system level  
overhead (Note 5)  
Word Programming Time  
<6  
<100  
<67  
µs  
µs  
Accelerated Word Programming Time  
<4  
128J  
<50.4  
<25.2  
<33  
Chip Programming Time  
(Note 3)  
Excludes system level  
overhead (Note 5)  
s
s
064J  
128J  
Accelerated Chip  
Programming Time  
064J  
<17  
Notes:  
1. Typical program and erase times assume the following conditions: 25°C, 1.8 V VCC, 100,000 cycles. Additionally,  
programming typicals assumes a checkerboard pattern.  
2. Under worst case conditions of 90°C, VCC = 1.65 V, 1,000,000 cycles.  
3. The typical chip programming time is considerably less than the maximum chip programming time listed.  
4. In the pre-programming step of the Embedded Erase algorithm, all words are programmed to 00h before erasure.  
5. System-level overhead is the time required to execute the two- or four-bus-cycle sequence for the program  
command. See Table 18, “Command Definitions,” on page 78 for further information on command definitions.  
6. The device has a minimum cycling endurance of 100,000 cycles per sector.  
115  
S29WS128/064J  
May 5, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
CosmoRAM  
32Mbit (2M word x 16-bit)  
64Mbit (4M word x 16-bit)  
Features  
„ Asynchronous SRAM Interface  
„ Fast Access Time  
— tCE = tAA = 70ns max  
„ 8 words Page Access Capability  
— tPAA = 20ns max  
„ Low Voltage Operating Condition  
— VDD = +1.65V to +1.95V (32M)  
— +1.70V to +1.95V (64M)  
„ Wide Operating Temperature  
— TA = -30°C to +85°C  
„ Byte Control by LB# and UB#  
„ Low Power Consumption  
— IDDA1 = 30mA max (32M), TBDmA max (64M)  
— IDDS1 = 80mA max (32M), TBDmA max (64M)  
„ Various Power Down mode  
— Sleep, 4M-bit Partial or 8M-bit Partial (32M)  
— Sleep, 8M-bit Partial or 16M-bit Partial (64M)  
October 5, 2004 CosmoRAM_00_A0  
CosmoRAM  
116  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Pin Description (32M)  
Pin Name  
A21 to A0  
CE1#  
CE2  
Description  
Address Input: A20 to A0 for 32M, A21 to A0 for 64M  
Chip Enable (Low Active)  
Chip Enable (High Active)  
Write Enable (Low Active)  
Output Enable (Low Active)  
Upper Byte Control (Low Active)  
Lower Byte Control (Low Active)  
Clock Input  
WE#  
OE#  
UB#  
LB#  
CLK  
ADV#  
WAIT#  
Address Valid Input (Low Active)  
Wait Signal Output  
DQ16 9  
-
Upper Byte Data Input/Output  
Lower Byte Data Input/Output  
Power Supply  
DQ8-1  
VDD  
VSS  
Ground  
117  
CosmoRAM  
CosmoRAM_00_A0 October 5, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Functional Description  
Asynchronous Operation (Page Mode)  
Mode  
Standby (Deselect)  
Output Disable (Note 1)  
Output Disable (No Read)  
Read (Upper Byte)  
Read (Lower Byte)  
Read (Word)  
CE2 CE1# CLK  
H
ADV#  
WE#  
OE#  
X
LB# UB# A21-0  
DQ8-1  
High-Z  
DQ16-9  
High-Z  
WAIT#  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
H
H
L
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
H
X
X
X
X
X
H
Note 5  
Valid  
Valid  
Valid  
Valid  
Valid  
Valid  
Valid  
Valid  
Valid  
X
High-Z  
High-Z  
H
H
L
H
L
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
Output Valid  
High-Z  
H
L
H
L
Output Valid  
L
Output Valid Output Valid  
L
(Note 3)  
Page Read  
L/H  
H
H
L
L/H  
H
L
Note 6  
Invalid  
Note 6  
Invalid  
No Write  
Write (Upper Byte)  
Write (Lower Byte)  
Write (Word)  
Invalid  
Input Valid  
Invalid  
H
L
(Note 4)  
H
L
Input Valid  
Input Valid  
High-Z  
L
Input Valid  
High-Z  
Power Down (Note 2)  
X
X
X
X
X
X
Legend:L = VIL, H = VIH, X can be either VIL or VIH, High-Z = High Impedance.  
Notes:  
1. Should not be kept at this logic condition longer than 1µs.  
2. Power Down mode can be entered from Standby state and all DQ pins are in High-Z state. Data retention depends on the  
selection of Partial Size. Refer to the "Power Down" section in the Functional Description for details.  
3. “L” for address pass through and “H” for address latch on the rising edge of ADV#.  
4. OE# can be VIL during Write operation if the following conditions are satisfied:  
(1) Write pulse is initiated by CE1# (refer to CE1# Controlled Write timing), or cycle time of the previous operation cycle is  
satisfied.  
(2) OE# stays VIL during Write cycle  
5. Can be either VIL or VIH but must be valid before Read or Write.  
6. Output is either Valid or High-Z depending on the level of UB# and LB# input.  
October 5, 2004 CosmoRAM_00_A0  
CosmoRAM  
118  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Functional Description  
Synchronous Operation (Burst Mode)  
Mode  
CE2 CE1#  
CLK  
ADV#  
WE#  
OE#  
LB#  
UB#  
A21-0  
DQ8-1  
DQ16-9  
WAIT#  
Standby (Deselect)  
H
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
Start Address  
Latch  
(Note 1)  
VE  
(Note 3)  
X
X
Valid  
(Note 7)  
High-Z  
(Note 8)  
High-Z  
(Note 8) (Note 11)  
High-Z  
PELP  
(Note 4) (Note 4)  
Advance Burst  
Read to Next  
Address (Note 1)  
Output  
Valid  
(Note 9)  
Output  
Output  
Valid  
(Note 9)  
VE  
(Note 3)  
L
Valid  
H
Burst Read  
Suspend  
(Note 1)  
VE  
High  
High-Z  
L
H
High-Z  
(Note 3)  
(Note 12)  
H
X
X
Input  
Advance Burst  
Write to Next  
Address (Note 1)  
(Note 6) (Note 6)  
Input  
Valid  
(Note 10)  
VE  
(Note 3)  
L
(Note 5)  
H
Valid  
(Note  
10)  
High  
H
X
(Note 13)  
Burst Write  
Suspend (Note 1)  
VE  
(Note 3)  
H
Iput  
Invalid  
Iput  
Invalid  
High  
(Note 12)  
(Note 5)  
Terminate Burst  
Read  
VE  
VE  
X
X
X
H
X
X
X
H
X
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
Terminate Burst  
Write  
Power Down  
(Note 2)  
L
X
X
X
X
X
Legend:L = VIL, H = VIH, X can be either VIL or VIH, VE = Valid Edge, PELP = Positive Edge of Low Pulse, High-  
Z = High Impedance.  
Notes:  
1. Should not be kept this logic condition longer than the specified time of 8µs for 32M and 4µs for 64M.  
2. Power Down mode can be entered from Standby state and all DQ pins are in High-Z state. Data retention depends on the  
selection of Partial Size. Refer to the "Power Down" section for details.F  
3. Valid clock edge shall be set on either positive or negative edge through CR Set. CLK must be started and stable prior to  
memory access.  
4. Can be either VIL or VIH except for the case the both of OE# and WE# are VIL. It is prohibited to bring the both of OE# and  
WE# to VIL  
.
5. When device is operating in “WE# Single Clock Pulse Control” mode, WE# is don’t care once write operation is determined by  
WE# Low Pulse at the beginning of write access together with address latching. Write suspend feature is not supported in  
“WE# Single Clock Pulse Control” mode.  
6. Can be either VIL or VIH but must be valid before Read or Write is determined. And once UB# and LB# inputs are  
determined, they must not be changed until the end of burst.  
7. Once valid address is determined, input address must not be changed during ADV#=L.  
8. If OE#=L, output is either Invalid or High-Z depending on the level of UB# and LB# input. If WE#=L, Input is Invalid. If  
OE#=WE#=H, output is High-Z.  
9. Output is either Valid or High-Z depending on the level of UB# and LB# input.  
10. Input is either Valid or Invalid depending on the level of UB# and LB# input.  
11. Output is either High-Z or Invalid depending on the level of OE# and WE# input.  
12. Keep the level from previous cycle except for suspending on last data. Refer to “WAIT# Output Function” for details.  
13. WAIT# output is driven in High level during write operation.  
119  
CosmoRAM  
CosmoRAM_00_A0 October 5, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
State Diagrams  
Initial/Standby State  
Asynchronous Operation  
(Page Mode)  
Power Up  
Synchronous Operation  
(Burst Mode)  
Common State  
CR Set  
Pause Time  
Power  
Down  
Power  
Down  
@M=1  
@M=0  
CE2=L  
CE2=L  
CE2=H  
CE2=H  
@RP=1  
Standby  
Standby  
(64M Only)  
CE2=H  
@RP=0  
Figure 38. Initial Standby State Diagram  
Asynchronous Operation State  
CE2=CE1# = H  
Standby  
CE1# = L  
CE1# = H  
CE1# = L &  
WE# = L  
CE1# = L &  
OE# =  
L
CE1#= H  
Output  
CE1# = H  
Disable  
WE# = H  
OE# =  
H
L
OE# =  
WE# = L  
Address Change  
or Byte Control  
Write  
Read  
Byte Control  
Byte Control @OE# = L  
Figure 39. Asynchronous Operation State Diagram  
October 5, 2004 CosmoRAM_00_A0  
CosmoRAM  
120  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Synchronous Operation State  
CE2 = CE1# = H  
Standby  
CE1# = H  
CE1# = H  
CE1# = H  
CE1# = H  
Write  
Read  
Suspend  
Suspend  
OE# = H  
WE# = H  
CE1# = L  
CE1# = L  
OE# = L  
ADV# Low Pulse  
& WE# = L  
ADV# Low Pulse  
& OE# = L  
WE# = L  
Write  
Read  
ADV# Low Pulse  
ADV# Low Pulse  
ADV# Low Pulse  
(@BL = 8 or 16, and after burst  
operation is completed)  
Figure 40. Synchronous Operation Diagram  
Notes:  
1. Assumes all the parameters specified in the "AC Characteristics" section are satisfied. Refer to the "Functional Description"  
section, "AC Characteristics" section, and the "Timing Diagrams" section for details. RP (Reset to Page) mode is available  
only for 64M.  
Functional Description  
This device supports asynchronous page read & normal write operation and syn-  
chronous burst read & burst write operation for faster memory access and  
features three kinds of power down modes for power saving as a user config-  
urable option.  
Power-up  
It is required to follow the power-up timing to start executing proper device op-  
eration. Refer to POWER-UP Timing. After Power-up, the device defaults to  
asynchronous page read & normal write operation mode with sleep power down  
feature.  
Configuration Register  
The Configuration Register (CR) is used to configure the type of device function  
among optional features. Each selection of features is set through CR Set se-  
quence after Power-up. If CR Set sequence is not performed after power-up, the  
device is configured for asynchronous operation with sleep power down feature  
as default configuration.  
CR Set Sequence  
The CR Set requires total 6 read/write operations with unique address. Between  
each read/write operation requires the device to be in standby mode. The follow-  
ing table shows the detail sequence.  
Cycle #  
1st  
Operation  
Read  
Address  
3FFFFFh (MSB)  
3FFFFFh  
Data  
Read Data (RDa)  
RDa  
2nd  
Write  
121  
CosmoRAM  
CosmoRAM_00_A0 October 5, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Cycle #  
3rd  
Operation  
Write  
Address  
3FFFFFh  
Data  
RDa  
4th  
Write  
3FFFFFh  
X
5th  
Write  
3FFFFFh  
X
6th  
Read  
Address Key  
Read Data (RDb)  
The first cycle is to read from most significant address (MSB).  
The second and third cycle are to write to MSB. If the second or third cycle is writ-  
ten into the different address, the CR Set is cancelled and the data written by the  
second or third cycle is valid as a normal write operation. It is recommended to  
write back the data (RDa) read by first cycle to MSB in order to secure the data.  
The forth and fifth cycle is to write to MSB. The data of forth and fifth cycle is  
don’t-care. If the forth or fifth cycle is written into different address, the CR Set  
is also cancelled but write data may not be written as normal write operation.  
The last cycle is to read from specific address key for mode selection. And read  
data (RDb) is invalid.  
Once this CR Set sequence is performed from an initial CR set to the other new  
CR set, the written data stored in memory cell array may be lost. So, CR Set se-  
quence should be performed prior to regular read/write operation if necessary to  
change from default configuration.  
October 5, 2004 CosmoRAM_00_A0  
CosmoRAM  
122  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Address Key  
The address key has the following format.  
Description  
Note  
Address  
Pin  
Register  
Name  
Function  
Key  
32M  
64M  
Unused bits muse be 1  
16M Partial  
A21  
1
1
00  
01  
10  
11  
8M Partial  
4M Partial  
8M Partial  
A20-A19  
PS  
Partial Size  
Reserved for future use  
Sleep [Default]  
2
2
000 to 001 Reserved for future use  
010  
011  
8 words  
A18-A16  
BL  
M
Burst Length  
16 words  
100 to 110 Reserved for future use  
2
111  
0
Continuous  
Synchronous Mode (Burst Read / Write)  
3
4
2
A15  
Mode  
1
Asynchronous Mode [Default] (Page Read / Normal Write)  
000  
001  
010  
011  
100  
Reserved for future use  
3 clocks  
4 clocks  
A14-A12  
RL  
Read Latency  
5 clocks  
Reserved for future use  
6 clocks  
101 to 111 Reserved for future use  
2
2
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Reserved for future use  
Sequential  
Burst  
A11  
A10  
A9  
BS  
SW  
VE  
Sequence  
Burst Read & Burst Write  
Burst Read & Single Write  
Falling Clock Edge  
Single Write  
5
Valid Clock  
Edge  
Rising Clock Edge  
Reset to Page mode  
6
5
1
A8  
RP  
Reset to Page  
Unused bits must be 1  
Remain the previous mode  
WE# Single Clock Pulse Control without Write Suspend  
Function  
0
A7  
WC  
Write Control  
1
1
WE# Level Control with Write Suspend Function  
Unused bits muse be 1  
A6-A0  
Notes:  
1. A21 and A6 to A0 must be all “1” in any case.  
2. It is prohibited to apply this key.  
3. If M=0, all the registers must be set with appropriate Key input at the same time.  
4. If M=1, PS must be set with appropriate Key input at the same time. Except for PS, all the other key inputs must be “1”.  
5. Burst Read & Single Write is not supported at WE# Single Clock Pulse Control.  
6. Effective only when PS=11. RP (Reset to Page) mode is available only for 64M.  
123  
CosmoRAM  
CosmoRAM_00_A0 October 5, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Power Down  
The Power Down is low power idle state controlled by CE2. CE2 Low drives the  
device in power down mode and maintains low power idle state as long as CE2 is  
kept Low. CE2 High resumes the device from power down mode. These devices  
have three power down mode. These can be programmed by series of read/write  
operations. Each mode has following features.  
32M  
Data Retention Size  
No  
64M  
Data Retention Size  
No  
Mode  
Retention Address  
N/A  
Mode  
Retention Address  
N/A  
Sleep (default)  
4M Partial  
Sleep (default)  
8M Partial  
4M bit  
000000h to 03FFFFh  
000000h to 07FFFFh  
8M bit  
000000h to 07FFFFh  
000000h to 0FFFFFh  
8M Partial  
8M bit  
16M Partial  
16M bit  
The default state is Sleep and it is the lowest power consumption but all data will  
be lost once CE2 is brought to Low for Power Down. It is not required to program  
to Sleep mode after power-up.  
64M supports Reset to Page (RP) mode. When RP=0, Power Down comprehends  
a function to reset the device to default configuration (asynchronous mode). After  
resuming from power down mode, the device is back in default configurations.  
This is effective only when PS is set on Sleep mode. When Partial mode is se-  
lected, RP=0 is not effective.  
Burst Read/Write Operation  
Synchronous burst read/write operation provides faster memory access that syn-  
chronized to microcontroller or system bus frequency. Configuration Register Set  
is required to perform burst read & write operation after power-up. Once CR Set  
sequence is performed to select synchronous burst mode, the device is config-  
ured to synchronous burst read/write operation mode with corresponding RL and  
BL that is set through CR Set sequence together with operation mode. In order  
to perform synchronous burst read & write operation, it is required to control new  
signals, CLK, ADV# and WAIT# that Low Power SRAMs don’t have.  
October 5, 2004 CosmoRAM_00_A0  
CosmoRAM  
124  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
CLK  
ADDRESS  
Valid  
ADV#  
CE1#  
OE#  
High  
WE#  
DQ  
RL  
High-Z  
High-Z  
Q1  
QBL  
Q2  
BL  
WAIT#  
Figure 41. Burst Read Operation  
CLK  
ADDRESS  
Valid  
ADV#  
CE1#  
High  
OE#  
WE#  
DQ  
RL-1  
High-Z  
High-Z  
D1  
DBL  
D2  
BL  
WAIT#  
Figure 42. Burst Write Operation  
CLK Input Function  
The CLK is input signal to synchronize memory to microcontroller or system bus  
frequency during synchronous burst read & write operation. The CLK input incre-  
ments device internal address counter and the valid edge of CLK is referred for  
latency counts from address latch, burst write data latch, and burst read data out.  
During synchronous operation mode, CLK input must be supplied except for  
standby state and power down state. CLK is don’t care during asynchronous  
operation.  
125  
CosmoRAM  
CosmoRAM_00_A0 October 5, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
ADV# Input Function  
The ADV# is input signal to indicate valid address presence on address inputs. It  
is applicable to synchronous operation as well as asynchronous operation. ADV#  
input is active during CE1#=L and CE1#=H disables ADV# input. All addresses  
are determined on the positive edge of ADV#.  
During synchronous burst read/write operation, ADV#=H disables all address in-  
puts. Once ADV# is brought to High after valid address latch, it is inhibited to  
bring ADV# Low until the end of burst or until burst operation is terminated.  
ADV# Low pulse is mandatory for synchronous burst read/write operation mode  
to latch the valid address input.  
During asynchronous operation, ADV#=H also disables all address inputs. ADV#  
can be tied to Low during asynchronous operation and it is not necessary to con-  
trol ADV# to High.  
WAIT# Output Function  
The WAIT# is output signal to indicate data bus status when the device is oper-  
ating in synchronous burst mode.  
During burst read operation, WAIT# output is enabled after specified time dura-  
tion from OE#=L or CE1#=L whichever occurs last. WAIT# output Low indicates  
data out at next clock cycle is invalid, and WAIT# output becomes High one clock  
cycle prior to valid data out. During OE# read suspend, WAIT# output doesn’t  
indicate data bus status but carries the same level from previous clock cycle (kept  
High) except for read suspend on the final data output. If final read data out is  
suspended, WAIT# output become high impedance after specified time duration  
from OE#=H.  
In case of continuous burst read operation of 32M, an additional output delay may  
occur when a burst sequence crosses it’s device-row boundary. The WAIT# out-  
put indicates this delay. Refer to the "Burst Length" section for the additional  
delay cycles in details.  
During burst write operation, WAIT# output is enabled to High level after speci-  
fied time duration from WE#=L or CE1#=L whichever occurs last and kept High  
for entire write cycles including WE# write suspend. The actual write data latch-  
ing starts on the appropriate clock edge with respect to Valid Clock Edge, Read  
Latency and Burst Length. During WE# write suspend, WAIT# output doesn’t in-  
dicate data bus status but carries the same level from previous clock cycle (kept  
High) except for write suspend on the final data input. If final write data in is sus-  
pended, WAIT# output become high impedance after specified time duration  
from WE#=H.  
The burst write operation of 32M and the both burst read/write operation of 64M  
are always started after fixed latency with respect to Read Latency set in CR.  
When the device is operating in asynchronous mode, WAIT# output is always in  
High Impedance.  
October 5, 2004 CosmoRAM_00_A0  
CosmoRAM  
126  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Latency  
Read Latency (RL) is the number of clock cycles between the address being  
latched and first read data becoming available during synchronous burst read op-  
eration. It is set through CR Set sequence after power-up. Once specific RL is set  
through CR Set sequence, write latency, that is the number of clock cycles be-  
tween address being latched and first write data being latched, is automatically  
set to RL-1.The burst operation is always started after fixed latency with respect  
to Read Latency set in CR. RL=6 is available only for 64M.  
CLK  
0
3
4
5
6
1
2
ADDRESS  
ADV#  
Valid  
CE1#  
OE# or WE#  
RL=3  
DQ [Out]  
WAIT#  
Q1  
Q2  
Q3  
Q4  
Q5  
D5  
High-Z  
DQ [In]  
WAIT#  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
High-Z  
RL=4  
DQ [Out]  
WAIT#  
Q1  
D2  
Q2  
D3  
Q3  
D4  
Q4  
D5  
High-Z  
DQ [In]  
WAIT#  
D1  
High-Z  
RL=5  
DQ [Out]  
WAIT#  
Q1  
D2  
Q2  
D3  
Q3  
D4  
High-Z  
DQ [In]  
WAIT#  
D1  
High-Z  
RL=6  
DQ [Out]  
WAIT#  
Q1  
D2  
Q2  
D3  
High-Z  
DQ [In]  
WAIT#  
D1  
High-Z  
Figure 43. Read Latency Diagram  
127  
CosmoRAM  
CosmoRAM_00_A0 October 5, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Address Latch by ADV#  
The ADV# indicates valid address presence on address inputs. During synchro-  
nous burst read/write operation mode, all the address are determined on the  
positive edge of ADV# when CE1#=L. The specified minimum value of ADV#=L  
setup time and hold time against valid edge of clock where RL count begin must  
be satisfied for appropriate RL counts. Valid address must be determined with  
specified setup time against either the negative edge of ADV# or negative edge  
of CE1# whichever comes late. And the determined valid address must not be  
changed during ADV#=L period.  
Burst Length  
Burst Length is the number of word to be read or write during synchronous burst  
read/write operation as the result of a single address latch cycle. It can be set on  
8, 16 words boundary or continuous for entire address through CR Set sequence.  
The burst type is sequential that is incremental decoding scheme within a bound-  
ary address. Starting from initial address being latched, device internal address  
counter assign +1 to the previous address until reaching the end of boundary ad-  
dress and then wrap round to least significant address (=0). After completing  
read data out or write data latch for the set burst length, operation automatically  
ended except for continuous burst length. When continuous burst length is set,  
read/write is endless unless it is terminated by the positive edge of CE1#.  
During continuous burst read of 32M, an additional output delay may occur when  
a burst sequence cross it’s device-row boundary. This is the case when A0 to A6  
of starting address is either 7Dh, 7Eh, or 7Fh as shown in the following table. The  
WAIT# signal indicates this delay. The 64M device has no additional output delay.  
Read Address Sequence  
Start Address  
(A6-A0)  
00h  
01h  
02h  
03h  
...  
BL = 8  
BL = 16  
Continuous  
00-01-02-03-04-...  
01-02-03-04-05-...  
02-03-04-05-06-...  
03-04-05-06-07-...  
...  
00-01-02-...-06-07  
01-02-03-...-07-00  
02-03-...-07-00-01  
03-...-07-00-01-02  
...  
00-01-02-...-0E-0F  
01-02-03-...-0F-00  
02-03-...-0F-00-01  
03-...-0F-00-01-02  
...  
7Ch  
7Dh  
7Eh  
7Fh  
7C-...-7F-78-...-7B  
7D-7E-7F-78-...-7C  
7E-7F-78-79-...-7D  
7F-78-79-7A-...-7E  
7C-...-7F-70-...-7B  
7D-7E-7F-70-...-7C  
7E-7F-70-71-...-7D  
7F-70-71-72-...-7E  
7C-7D-7E-7F-80-81-...  
7D-7E-7F-WAIT-80-81-...  
7E-7F-WAIT-WAIT-80-81-...  
7F-WAIT WAIT  
-
-WAIT-80-81  
Note: Read address in Hexadecimal.  
Single Write  
Single Write is synchronous write operation with Burst Length =1. The device can  
be configured either to “Burst Read & Single Write” or to “Burst Read & Burst  
Write” through CR set sequence. Once the device is configured to “Burst Read &  
Single Write” mode, the burst length for synchronous write operation is always  
fixed 1 regardless of BL values set in CR, while burst length for read is in accor-  
dance with BL values set in CR.  
October 5, 2004 CosmoRAM_00_A0  
CosmoRAM  
128  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Write Control  
The device has two types of WE# signal control method, “WE# Level Control” and  
“WE# Single Clock Pulse Control, for synchronous write operation. It is config-  
ured through CR set sequence.  
CLK  
0
3
4
5
6
1
2
ADDRESS  
Valid  
ADV#  
CE1#  
RL=5  
WE# Level Control  
WE#  
tWLD  
DQ [In]  
WAIT#  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
tWLTH  
High-Z  
WE# Single Clock Pulse Control  
tWSCK  
WE#  
tCKWH  
DQ [In]  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
tCLTH  
tWLTH  
WAIT#  
High-Z  
Figure 44. Write Controls  
Burst Read Suspend  
Burst read operation can be suspended by OE# High pulse. During burst read op-  
eration, OE# brought to High suspends burst read operation. Once OE# is  
brought to High with the specified set up time against clock where the data being  
suspended, the device internal counter is suspended, and the data output be-  
come high impedance after specified time duration. It is inhibited to suspend the  
first data out at the beginning of burst read.  
OE# brought to Low resumes burst read operation. Once OE# is brought to Low,  
data output become valid after specified time duration, and internal address  
counter is reactivated. The last data out being suspended as the result of OE#=H  
and first data out as the result of OE#=L are from the same address.  
In order to guarantee to output last data before suspension and first data after  
resumption, the specified minimum value of OE#=L hold time and setup time  
against clock edge must be satisfied respectively.  
129  
CosmoRAM  
CosmoRAM_00_A0 October 5, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
CLK  
OE#  
tCKOH tOSCK  
tCKOH tOSCK  
tAC  
tOHZ  
Q2  
tAC  
tAC  
Q2  
tAC  
Q3  
Q1  
DQ  
Q4  
tCKQX  
tOLZ  
tCKQX  
tCKQX  
tCKTV  
WAIT#  
Figure 45. Burst Read Suspend Diagram  
Burst Write Suspend  
Burst write operation can be suspended by WE# High pulse. During burst write  
operation, WE# brought to High suspends burst write operation. Once WE# is  
brought to High with the specified set up time against clock where the data being  
suspended, device internal counter is suspended, data input is ignored. It is in-  
hibited to suspend the first data input at the beginning of burst write.  
WE# brought to Low resumes burst write operation. Once WE# is brought to Low,  
data input become valid after specified time duration, and internal address  
counter is reactivated. The write address of the cycle where data being sus-  
pended and the first write address as the result of WE#=L are the same address.  
In order to guarantee to latch the last data input before suspension and first data  
input after resumption, the specified minimum value of WE#=L hold time and  
setup time against clock edge must be satisfied respectively. Burst write suspend  
function is available when the device is operating in WE# level controlled burst  
write only.  
CLK  
tCKWH tWSCK  
tCKWH tWSCK  
WE#  
tDSCK  
tDSCK  
tDSCK  
tDSCK  
DQ  
D1  
D2  
D2  
D3  
D4  
tDHCK  
tDHCK  
tDHCK  
High  
Figure 46. Burst Write Suspend Diagram  
WAIT#  
Burst Read Termination  
Burst read operation can be terminated by CE1# brought to High. If BL is set on  
Continuous, burst read operation is continued endless unless terminated by  
October 5, 2004 CosmoRAM_00_A0  
CosmoRAM  
130  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
CE1#=H. It is inhibited to terminate burst read before first data out is completed.  
In order to guarantee last data output, the specified minimum value of CE1#=L  
hold time from clock edge must be satisfied. After termination, the specified min-  
imum recovery time is required to start new access.  
CLK  
ADDRESS  
Valid  
ADV#  
CE1#  
tTRB  
tCKCLH  
tCKOH  
tCHZ  
tOHZ  
OE#  
WAIT#  
DQ  
High-Z  
tCHTZ  
tCKQX  
tAC  
Q1  
Q2  
Figure 47. Burst Read Termination Diagram  
Burst Write Termination  
Burst write operation can be terminated by CE1# brought to High. If BL is set on  
Continuous, burst write operation is continued endless unless terminated by  
CE1#=H. It is inhibited to terminate burst write before first data in is completed.  
In order to guarantee last write data being latched, the specified minimum values  
of CE1#=L hold time from clock edge must be satisfied. After termination, the  
specified minimum recovery time is required to start new access.  
CLK  
ADDRESS  
Valid  
ADV#  
CE1#  
tTRB  
tCKCLH  
tCKWH  
tCHCK  
WE#  
WAIT#  
DQ  
tCHTZ  
High-Z  
tDSCK  
tDSCK  
D1  
D2  
tDHCK  
tDHCK  
Figure 48. Burst Write Termination Diagram  
131  
CosmoRAM  
CosmoRAM_00_A0 October 5, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Absolute Maximum Ratings  
Item  
Voltage of VDD Supply Relative to VSS  
Voltage at Any Pin Relative to VSS  
Short Circuit Output Current  
Storage temperature  
Symbol  
VDD  
Value  
Unit  
V
-0.5 to +3.6  
-0.5 to +3.6  
±50  
VIN, VOUT  
IOUT  
V
mA  
°C  
TSTG  
-55 to +125  
WARNING: Semiconductor devices can be permanently damaged by application of stress (voltage, current, temperature,  
etc.) in excess of absolute maximum ratings. Do not exceed these ratings.  
Recommended Operating Conditions (See Warning Below)  
32M  
64M  
Parameter  
Symbol  
VDD  
VSS  
VIH  
Min  
1.65  
0
Max  
1.95  
Min  
1.7  
Max  
1.95  
Unit  
V
Supply Voltage  
0
0
0
V
High Level Input Voltage (Note 1)  
High Level Input Voltage (Note 2)  
Ambient Temperature  
VDD x 0.8  
-0.3  
VDD+0.2  
VDD x 0.2  
85  
VDD x 0.8  
-0.3  
VDD+0.2  
VDD x 0.2  
85  
V
VIL  
V
TA  
-30  
-30  
°C  
Notes:  
1. Maximum DC voltage on input and I/O pins are VDD+0.2V. During voltage transitions, inputs may positive overshoot to  
DD+1.0V for periods of up to 5 ns.  
V
2. Minimum DC voltage on input or I/O pins are -0.3V. During voltage transitions, inputs may negative overshoot VSS to -1.0V  
for periods of up to 5ns.  
WARNING: Recommended operating conditions are normal operating ranges for the semiconductor device. All the de-  
vice’s electrical characteristics are warranted when operated within these ranges.  
Always use semiconductor devices within the recommended operating conditions. Operation outside these ranges may  
adversely affect reliability and could result in device failure.  
No warranty is made with respect to uses, operating conditions, or combinations not represented on the data sheet.  
Package Pin Capacitance  
Test conditions: TA = 25°C, f = 1.0 MHz  
Symbol  
Description  
Te s t S e tup  
VIN = 0V  
VIN = 0V  
VIO = 0V  
Typ  
Max  
5
Unit  
pF  
CIN1  
CIN2  
CIO  
Address Input Capacitance  
Control Input Capacitance  
Data Input/Output Capacitance  
5
pF  
8
pF  
October 5, 2004 CosmoRAM_00_A0  
CosmoRAM  
132  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
DC Characteristics  
(Under Recommended Conditions Unless Otherwise Noted)  
32M  
64M  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Test Conditions  
Unit  
Min.  
Max.  
Min.  
Max.  
Input Leakage  
Current  
ILI  
VIN = VSS to VDD  
-1.0  
+1.0  
-1.0  
+1.0  
µA  
µA  
V
Output Leakage  
Current  
ILO  
VOUT = VSS to VDD, Output Disable  
VDD = VDD(min), IOH = –0.5mA  
IOL = 1mA  
-1.0  
2.4  
+1.0  
-1.0  
2.4  
+1.0  
Output High Voltage  
Level  
VOH  
Output Low Voltage  
Level  
VOL  
0.4  
0.4  
V
IDDPS  
IDDP4  
IDDP8  
IDDP16  
SLEEP  
10  
40  
50  
TBD  
µA  
µA  
µA  
4M Partial  
8M Partial  
16M Partial  
N/A  
VDD = VDD max.,  
VDD Power Down  
Current  
VIN = VIH or VIL  
CE2 0.2V  
,
TBD  
TBD  
N/A  
VDD = VDD max.,  
IN (including CLK)= VIH or VIL  
IDDS  
V
,
1.5  
TBD  
mA  
CE1# = CE2 = VIH  
VDD = VDD max.,  
TA +85°C  
TA +40°C  
80  
80  
TBD  
TBD  
µA  
µA  
VDD Standby  
Current  
V
V
IN (including CLK) 0.2V or  
IDDS1  
IN (including CLK) VDD – 0.2V,  
CE1# = CE2 VDD – 0.2V  
VDD = VDD max., tCK=min.  
VIN 0.2V or VIN VDD – 0.2V,  
CE1# = CE2 VDD – 0.2V  
200  
TBD  
µA  
tRC / tWC  
=
IDDA1  
30  
3
35  
5
mA  
mA  
VDD = VDD max.,  
minimum  
VIN = VIH or VIL  
,
V
DD Active Current  
CE1# = VIL and CE2= VIH  
IOUT=0mA  
,
tRC / tWC  
=
IDDA2  
1µs  
VDD = VDD max., VIN = VIH or VIL  
CE1# = VIL and CE2= VIH  
IOUT=0mA, tPRC = min.  
,
VDD Page Read  
Current  
IDDA3  
,
10  
15  
TBD  
TBD  
mA  
mA  
VDD = VDD max., VIN = VIH or VIL  
CE1# = VIL and CE2= VIH  
tCK = tCK min., BL = Continuous,  
OUT=0mA  
,
V
DD Burst Access  
,
IDDA4  
Current  
I
Notes:  
1. All voltages are referenced to VSS  
.
2. DC Characteristics are measured after following POWER-UP timing.  
3. IOUT depends on the output load conditions.  
133  
CosmoRAM  
CosmoRAM_00_A0 October 5, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
AC Characteristics  
(Under Recommended Operating Conditions Unless Otherwise Noted)  
Read Operation  
32M  
64M  
Parameter  
Symbol  
tRC  
Min.  
70  
Max.  
1000  
70  
40  
70  
70  
30  
20  
1000  
Min.  
70  
Max.  
1000  
70  
40  
70  
70  
30  
20  
1000  
Unit  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Notes  
Read Cycle Time  
CE1# Access Time  
OE# Access Time  
1, 2  
tCE  
3
tOE  
3
Address Access Time  
tAA  
3, 5  
ADV# Access Time  
tAV  
3
LB# / UB# Access Time  
tBA  
20  
5
20  
5
3
Page Address Access Time  
Page Read Cycle Time  
tPAA  
tPRC  
tOH  
3,6  
1, 6, 7  
Output Data Hold Time  
3
4
4
4
3
3
3
CE1# Low to Output Low-Z  
OE# Low to Output Low-Z  
LB# / UB# Low to Output Low-Z  
CE1# High to Output High-Z  
OE# High to Output High-Z  
LB# / UB# High to Output High-Z  
Address Setup Time to CE1# Low  
Address Setup Time to OE# Low  
ADV# Low Pulse Width  
tCLZ  
tOLZ  
tBLZ  
tCHZ  
tOHZ  
tBHZ  
tASC  
tASO  
tVPL  
tVPH  
tASV  
tAHV  
tAX  
5
5
10  
0
0
0
–5  
10  
10  
15  
5
20  
20  
20  
–5  
10  
10  
15  
5
20  
20  
20  
8
8
ADV# High Pulse Width  
Address Setup Time to ADV High  
Address Hold Time from ADV# High  
Address Invalid Time  
10  
–5  
–5  
15  
15  
5
10  
–5  
–5  
25  
15  
10  
5, 9  
10  
Address Hold Time from CE1# High  
Address Hold Time from OE# High  
WE# High to OE# Low Time for Read  
CE1# High Pulse Width  
tCHAH  
tOHAH  
tWHOL  
tCP  
10  
1000  
1000  
11  
Notes:  
1. Maximum value is applicable if CE#1 is kept at Low without change of address input of A3 to A21.  
2. Address should not be changed within minimum tRC  
3. The output load 50pF with 50ohm termination to VDD*0.5 V.  
.
October 5, 2004 CosmoRAM_00_A0  
CosmoRAM  
134  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
4. The output load 5pF without any other load.  
5. Applicable to A3 to A21 when CE1# is kept at Low.  
6. Applicable only to A0, A1 and A2 when CE1# is kept at Low for the page address access.  
7. In case Page Read Cycle is continued with keeping CE1# stays Low, CE1# must be brought to High within 4µs. In other  
words, Page Read Cycle must be closed within 4µs.  
8. tVPL is specified from the negative edge of either CE1# or ADV# whichever comes late. The sum of tVPL and tVPH must be  
equal or greater than tRC for each access.  
9. Applicable to address access when at least two of address inputs are switched from previous state.  
10. tRC(min) and tPRC(min) must be satisfied.  
11. If actual value of tWHOL is shorter than specified minimum values, the actual tAA of following Read may become longer by the  
amount of subtracting actual value from specified minimum value.  
135  
CosmoRAM  
CosmoRAM_00_A0 October 5, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Write Operation  
32M  
64M  
Parameter  
Symbol  
tWC  
tAS  
Min.  
70  
0
Max.  
1000  
Min.  
70  
0
Max.  
1000  
Unit  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Notes  
1, 2  
3
Write Cycle Time  
Address Setup Time  
ADV# Low Pulse Width  
tVPL  
tVPH  
tASV  
tAHV  
tCW  
tWP  
10  
15  
5
10  
15  
5
4
ADV# High Pulse Width  
Address Setup Time to ADV# High  
Address Hold Time from ADV# High  
CE1# Write Pulse Width  
WE# Write Pulse Width  
LB# / UB# Write Pulse Width  
LB# / UB# Byte Mask Setup Time  
LB# / UB# Byte Mask Hold Time  
CE1# Write Recovery Time  
Write Recovery Time  
10  
45  
45  
45  
-5  
-5  
15  
15  
15  
15  
15  
15  
0
5
45  
45  
45  
-5  
-5  
15  
15  
15  
15  
15  
15  
0
3
3
3
5
6
7
7
tBW  
tBS  
tBH  
tWRC  
tWR  
tCP  
1000  
1000  
CE1# High Pulse Width  
WE# High Pulse Width  
tWHP  
tBHP  
tDS  
1000  
1000  
1000  
1000  
LB# / UB# High Pulse Width  
Data Setup Time  
Data Hold Time  
tDH  
OE# High to CE1# Low Setup Time for Write  
OE# High to Address Setup Time for Write  
LB# / UB# Write Pulse Overlap  
tOHCL  
tOES  
-5  
0
-5  
0
8
9
tBWO  
30  
30  
Notes:  
1. Maximum value is applicable if CE1# is kept at Low without any address change.  
2. Minimum value must be equal or greater than the sum of write pulse (tCW, tWP or tBW) and write recovery time (tWR).  
3. Write pulse is defined from High to Low transition of CE1#, WE#, or LB# / UB#, whichever occurs last.  
4.  
t
VPL is specified from the negative edge of either CE#1 or ADV# whichever comes late. The sum of tVPL and tVPH must be  
equal or greater than tWC for each access.  
5. Applicable for byte mask only. Byte mask setup time is defined to the High to Low transition of CE1# or WE# whichever  
occurs last.  
6. Applicable for byte mask only. Byte mask hold time is defined from the Low to High transition of CE1# or WE# whichever  
occurs first.  
7. Write recovery is defined from Low to High transition of CE1#, WE#, or LB# / UB#, whichever occurs first.  
8. If OE# is Low after minimum tOHCL, read cycle is initiated. In other words, OE# must be brought to High within 5ns after  
CE1# is brought to Low. Once read cycle is initiated, new write pulse should be input after minimum tRC is met.  
9. If OE# is Low after new address input, read cycle is initiated. In other word, OE# must be brought to High at the same time  
or before new address valid. Once read cycle is initiated, new write pulse should be input after minimum tRC is met and data  
bus is in High-Z.  
October 5, 2004 CosmoRAM_00_A0  
CosmoRAM  
136  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Synchronous Operation - Clock Input (Burst Mode)  
32M  
64M  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Min.  
Max.  
Min.  
13  
15  
18  
30  
4
Max.  
Unit  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Notes  
RL = 6  
RL = 5  
RL = 4  
RL = 3  
N/A  
15  
20  
30  
5
3
Clock Period  
tCK  
1
Clock High Time  
Clock Low Time  
Clock Rise/Fall Time  
Notes:  
tCKH  
tCKL  
tCKT  
3
5
4
2
1. Clock period is defined between valid clock edges.  
2. Clock rise/fall time is defined between VIH Min. and VIL Max.  
Synchronous Operation - Address Latch (Burst Mode)  
32M  
64M  
Parameter  
Symbol  
tASVL  
tASCL  
tAHV  
Min.  
-5  
Max.  
Min.  
-5  
-5  
5
Max.  
Unit  
Notes  
Address Setup Time to ADV# Low  
Address Setup Time to CE1# Low  
Address Hold Time from ADV# High  
ADV# Low Pulse Width  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
1
2
-5  
10  
10  
tVPL  
10  
5
3
4
4
4
4
4
RL = 6, 5  
ADV# Low Setup Time to CLK  
tVSCK  
7
7
RL = 4, 3  
RL = 6, 5  
RL = 4, 3  
7
5
CE1 Low Setup Time to CLK  
tCLCK  
7
ADV# Low Hold Time from CLK  
tCKVH  
tVHVL  
1
1
Burst End ADV# High Hold Time from CLK  
15  
13  
Notes:  
1. tASCL is applicable if CE1# is brought to Low after ADV# is brought to Low.  
2.  
t
ASVL is applicable if ADV# is brought to Low after CE1# is brought to Low.  
3.  
t
VPL is specified from the negative edge of either CE1# or ADV# whichever comes late.  
4. Applicable to the 1st valid clock edge.  
137  
CosmoRAM  
CosmoRAM_00_A0 October 5, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Synchronous Read Operation (Burst Mode)  
32M  
64M  
Parameter  
Burst Read Cycle Time  
Symbol  
Min.  
Max.  
Min.  
3
Max.  
4000  
10  
12  
Unit  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Notes  
tRCB  
8000  
RL = 6, 5  
RL = 4, 3  
1
1
CLK Access Time  
tAC  
12  
Output Hold Time from CLK  
CE1# Low to WAIT# Low  
tCKQX  
tCLTL  
tOLTL  
tVLTL  
tCKTV  
tCKTX  
tCLZ  
3
5
0
20  
20  
1
5
20  
20  
20  
10  
1
OE# Low to WAIT# Low  
0
1, 2  
1
ADV# Low to WAIT# Low  
N/A  
0
CLK to WAIT# Valid Time  
3
12  
14  
14  
14  
20  
20  
3
1, 3  
1
WAIT# Valid Hold Time from CLK  
CE1# Low to Output Low-Z  
OE# Low to Output Low-Z  
LB#, UB# Low to Output Low-Z  
CE1# High to Output High-Z  
OE# High to Output High-Z  
LB#, UB# High to Output High-Z  
CE1# High to WAIT High-Z  
OE# High to WAIT High-Z  
OE# Low Setup Time to 1st Data-out  
5
5
4
tOLZ  
10  
0
10  
0
4
tBLZ  
4
tCHZ  
30  
30  
5
30  
26  
5
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
1
tOHZ  
tBHZ  
1
1
tCHTZ  
tOHTZ  
tOLQ  
1
1
UB#, LB# Setup Time to 1st Data-out  
OE# Setup Time to CLK  
tBLQ  
5
tOSCK  
tCKOH  
tCKCLH  
tCKBH  
OE# Hold Time from CLK  
5
5
Burst End CE1# Low Hold Time from CLK  
Burst End UB#, LB# Hold Time from CLK  
5
5
5
5
BL=8, 16  
BL=Continuous  
30  
70  
26  
70  
6
6
Burst Terminate Recovery Time  
tTRB  
Notes:  
1. The output load 50pF with 50ohm termination to VDD*0.5 V.  
2. WAIT# drives High at the beginning depending on OE# falling edge timing.  
3. tCKTV is guaranteed after tOLTL (max) from OE# falling edge and tOSCK must be satisfied.  
4. The output load is 5pF without any other load.  
5. Once they are determined, they must not be changed until the end of burst.  
6. Defined from the Low to High transition of CE1# to the High to Low transition of either ADV# or CE1# whichever occurs late.  
October 5, 2004 CosmoRAM_00_A0  
CosmoRAM  
138  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Synchronous Write Operation (Burst Mode)  
32M  
64M  
Parameter  
Burst Write Cycle Time  
Symbol  
tWCB  
Min.  
7
Max.  
8000  
Min.  
5
Max.  
4000  
Unit  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Notes  
Data Setup Time to Clock  
tDSCK  
tDHCK  
tWLD  
Data Hold Time from CLK  
3
3
WE# Low Setup Time to 1st Data In  
UB#, LB# Setup Time for Write  
WE# Setup Time to CLK  
30  
-5  
5
30  
-5  
5
tBS  
1
tWSCK  
tCKWH  
tCLTH  
tWLTH  
tCHTZ  
tWHTZ  
tCKCLH  
tCHCK  
tCKBH  
tWRB  
WE# Hold Time from CLK  
5
5
CE1# Low to WAIT# High  
5
20  
20  
20  
20  
5
20  
20  
20  
20  
2
2
2
2
WE# Low to WAIT# High  
0
0
CE1# High to WAIT# High-Z  
WE# High to WAIT# High-Z  
5
5
Burst End CE1# Low Hold Time from CLK  
Burst End CE1# High Setup Time to next CLK  
Burst End UB#, LB# Hold Time from CLK  
Burst Write Recovery Time  
5
5
5
5
30  
30  
70  
26  
26  
70  
BL=8, 16  
Burst Terminate Recovery Time  
BL=Continuous  
tTRB  
3
4
tTRB  
Notes:  
1. Defined from the valid input edge to the High to Low transition of either ADV#, CE1#, or WE#, whichever occurs last. And  
once they are determined, they must not be changed until the end of burst.  
2. The output load 50pF with 50ohm termination to VDD*0.5 V.  
3. Defined from the valid clock edge where last data-in being latched at the end of burst write to the High to Low transition of  
either ADV# or CE1# whichever occurs late for the next access.  
4. Defined from the Low to High transition of CE1# to the High to Low transition of either ADV# or CE1# whichever occurs late  
for the next access.  
139  
CosmoRAM  
CosmoRAM_00_A0 October 5, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Power Down Parameters  
32M  
64M  
Parameter  
Symbol  
tCSP  
Min.  
20  
Max.  
Min.  
10  
Max.  
Unit  
ns  
Notes  
CE2 Low Setup Time for Power Down Entry  
CE2 Low Hold Time after Power Down Entry  
CE2 Low Hold Time for Reset to Asynchronous Mode  
tC2LP  
70  
70  
ns  
tC2LPR  
N/A  
50  
µs  
1
2
CE1# High Hold Time following CE2 High after Power  
Down Exit [SLEEP mode only]  
tCHH  
tCHHP  
tCHS  
300  
70  
0
300  
70  
0
µs  
µs  
ns  
CE1# High Hold Time following CE2 High after Power  
Down Exit [not in SLEEP mode]  
3
2
CE1# High Setup Time following CE2 High after Power  
Down Exit  
Notes:  
1. Applicable when RP=0 (Reset to Page mode). RP (Reset to Page) mode is available only for 64M.  
2. Applicable also to power-up.  
3. Applicable when Partial mode is set.  
Other Timing Parameters  
32M  
64M  
Parameter  
CE1 High to OE Invalid Time for Standby Entry  
CE1 High to WE Invalid Time for Standby Entry  
CE2 Low Hold Time after Power-up  
CE1 High Hold Time following CE2 High after Power-up  
Input Transition Time  
Symbol  
tCHOX  
tCHWX  
tC2LH  
tCHH  
Min.  
10  
10  
50  
300  
1
Max.  
Min.  
10  
10  
50  
300  
1
Max.  
Unit  
ns  
Notes  
ns  
1
µs  
µs  
tT  
25  
25  
ns  
2
Notes:  
1. Some data might be written into any address location if tCHWX(min) is not satisfied.  
2. Except for clock input transition time.  
3. The Input Transition Time (tT) at AC testing is 5ns for Asynchronous operation and 3ns for Synchronous operation  
respectively. If actual tT is longer than 5ns or 3ns specified as AC test condition, it may violate AC specification of some  
timing parameters. See the "AC Test Conditions" section  
AC Test Conditions  
Symbol  
VIH  
Description  
Te s t S e tu p  
Value  
VDD * 0.8  
VDD * 0.2  
VDD * 0.5  
5
Unit  
V
Note  
Input High Level  
Input Low Level  
VIL  
V
VREF  
Input Timing Measurement Level  
V
Async.  
Sync.  
ns  
ns  
tT  
Input Transition Time  
Between VIL and VIH  
3
October 5, 2004 CosmoRAM_00_A0  
CosmoRAM  
140  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
AC Measurement Output Load Circuit  
VDD*0.5V  
50ohm  
VDD  
DEVICE  
UNDER  
TEST  
OUT  
0.1µF  
VSS  
50pF  
Figure 49. Output Load Circuit  
141  
CosmoRAM  
CosmoRAM_00_A0 October 5, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Timing Diagrams  
tRC  
ADDRESS VALID  
ADDRESS  
ADV#  
CE1#  
Low  
tASC  
tCE  
tCHAH  
tASC  
tCP  
tCHZ  
tOE  
OE#  
tOHZ  
tBHZ  
tBA  
LB# / UB#  
tBLZ  
tOLZ  
DQ  
(Output)  
VALID DATA OUTPUT  
Figure 50. Asynchronous Read Timing #1-1 (Basic Timing)  
tOH  
Note: This timing diagram assumes CE2=H and WE#=H.  
tRC  
ADDRESS VALID  
ADDRESS  
ADV#  
tAHV  
tAV  
tVPL  
tASC  
tASC  
tCE  
CE1#  
tCP  
tOE  
tCHZ  
OE#  
tOHZ  
tBHZ  
tBA  
LB# / UB#  
tBLZ  
tOLZ  
DQ  
(Output)  
VALID DATA OUTPUT  
Figure 51. Asynchronous Read Timing #1-2 (Basic Timing)  
tOH  
Note: This timing diagram assumes CE2=H and WE#=H.  
October 5, 2004 CosmoRAM_00_A0  
CosmoRAM  
142  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
tAX  
tRC  
tRC  
ADDRESS  
CE1#  
ADDRESS VALID  
ADDRESS VALID  
tAA  
tAA  
tOHAH  
Low  
tASO  
tOE  
OE#  
LB# / UB#  
tOLZ  
tOH  
tOHZ  
tOH  
DQ  
(Output)  
VALID DATA OUTPUT  
Figure 52. Asynchronous Read Timing #2 (OE# & Address Access)  
VALID DATA OUTPUT  
Note: This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, ADV#=L and WE#=H.  
tAX  
tRC  
tAX  
ADDRESS  
ADDRESS VALID  
tAA  
Low  
CE1#, OE#  
LB#  
tBA  
tBA  
tBA  
UB#  
tBHZ  
tOH  
tBHZ  
tOH  
tBLZ  
tBLZ  
DQ1-8  
(Output)  
VALID DATA  
OUTPUT  
tBHZ  
VALID DATA  
OUTPUT  
tOH  
tBLZ  
DQ9-16  
(Output)  
VALID DATA OUTPUT  
Figure 53. Asynchronous Read Timing #3 (LB# / UB# Byte Access)  
Note: This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, ADV#=L and WE#=H.  
143  
CosmoRAM  
CosmoRAM_00_A0 October 5, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
tRC  
ADDRESS  
(A21-A3)  
ADDRESS VALID  
tRC  
tPRC  
tPRC  
tPRC  
ADDRESS  
(A2-A0)  
ADDRESS  
VALID  
ADDRESS  
VALID  
ADDRESS  
VALID  
ADDRESS VALID  
tPAA  
tPAA  
tPAA  
tASC  
tCHAH  
ADV#  
CE1#  
tCHZ  
tCE  
OE#  
LB# / UB#  
tOH  
tCLZ  
tOH  
tOH  
tOH  
DQ  
(Output)  
VALID DATA OUTPUT  
(Page Access)  
VALID DATA OUTPUT  
(Normal Access)  
Figure 54. Asynchronous Read Timing #4 (Page Address Access after CE1# Control Access)  
Note: This timing diagram assumes CE2=H and WE#=H.  
tRC  
tAX  
tRC  
tAX  
ADDRESS  
(A21-A3)  
ADDRESS VALID  
ADDRESS VALID  
tRC  
tPRC  
tRC  
tPRC  
ADDRESS  
(A2-A0)  
ADDRESS  
VALID  
ADDRESS  
VALID  
ADDRESS  
VALID  
ADDRESS  
VALID  
tAA  
tPAA  
tAA  
tPAA  
CE1#  
Low  
tASO  
tOE  
OE#  
tBA  
LB# / UB#  
tOLZ  
tBLZ  
tOH  
tOH  
tOH  
tOH  
DQ  
(Output)  
VALID DATA OUTPUT  
(Page Access)  
VALID DATA OUTPUT  
(Normal Access)  
Figure 55. Asynchronous Read Timing #5 (Random and Page Address  
Access)  
Notes:  
1. This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, ADV#=L and WE#=H.  
2. Either or both LB# and UB# must be Low when both CE1# and OE# are Low.  
October 5, 2004 CosmoRAM_00_A0  
CosmoRAM  
144  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
tWC  
ADDRESS  
ADV#  
ADDRESS VALID  
Low  
tAS  
tCW  
tWP  
tBW  
tWRC  
tWR  
tBR  
tAS  
CE1#  
tAS  
tAS  
WE#  
tAS  
tAS  
LB#, UB#  
tOHCL  
OE#  
tDS  
tDH  
DQ  
(Input)  
VALID DATA INPUT  
Figure 56. Asynchronous Write Timing #1-1 (Basic Timing)  
Note: This timing diagram assumes CE2=H and ADV#=L.  
tWC  
ADDRESS  
ADV#  
ADDRESS VALID  
tVPL  
tAHV  
tCW  
tAS  
tWRC  
tWR  
tBR  
tAS  
CE1#  
tAS  
tWP  
tAS  
WE#  
tAS  
tBW  
tAS  
LB#, UB#  
tOHCL  
OE#  
tDS  
tDH  
DQ  
(Input)  
VALID DATA INPUT  
Figure 57. Asynchronous Write Timing #1-2 (Basic Timing)  
Note: This timing diagram assumes CE2=H.  
145  
CosmoRAM  
CosmoRAM_00_A0 October 5, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
tWC  
tWC  
ADDRESS VALID  
ADDRESS VALID  
ADDRESS  
CE1#  
tOHAH  
Low  
tAS  
tWP  
tWR  
tAS  
tWP  
tWR  
WE#  
UB#, LB#  
OE#  
tOES  
tOHZ  
tDS  
tDH  
tDS  
tDH  
DQ  
(Input)  
VALID DATA INPUT  
VALID DATA INPUT  
Figure 58. Asynchronous Write Timing #2 (WE# Control)  
Note: This timing diagram assumes CE2=H and ADV#=L.  
tWC  
tWC  
ADDRESS VALID  
ADDRESS VALID  
ADDRESS  
CE1#  
Low  
tAS  
tWP  
tAS  
tWP  
WE#  
LB#  
UB#  
tBH  
tBR  
tBS  
tBR  
tBS  
tBH  
tDS  
tDH  
DQ1-8  
(Input)  
VALID DATA INPUT  
tDS  
tDH  
DQ9-16  
(Input)  
VALID DATA INPUT  
Figure 59. Asynchronous Write Timing #3-1 (WE# / LB# / UB# Byte Write Control)  
Note: This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, ADV#=L and OE#=H.  
October 5, 2004 CosmoRAM_00_A0  
CosmoRAM  
146  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
tWC  
tWC  
ADDRESS VALID  
ADDRESS VALID  
ADDRESS  
CE1#  
Low  
tWR  
tWR  
WE#  
LB#  
UB#  
tAS  
tBW  
tBS  
tBH  
tAS  
tBW  
tBH  
tBS  
tDS  
tDH  
DQ1-8  
(Input)  
VALID DATA INPUT  
tDS  
tDH  
DQ9-16  
(Input)  
VALID DATA INPUT  
Figure 60. Asynchronous Write Timing #3-2 (WE# / LB# / UB# Byte Write Control)  
Note: This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, ADV#=L and OE#=H.  
tWC  
tWC  
ADDRESS VALID  
ADDRESS VALID  
ADDRESS  
CE1#  
Low  
WE#  
LB#  
UB#  
tAS  
tBW  
tBR  
tBS  
tBH  
tAS  
tBW  
tBR  
tBS  
tBH  
tDS  
tDH  
DQ1-8  
(Input)  
VALID DATA INPUT  
tDS  
tDH  
DQ9-16  
(Input)  
VALID DATA INPUT  
Figure 61. Asynchronous Write Timing #3-3 (WE# / LB# / UB# Byte Write Control)  
Note: This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, ADV#=L and OE#=H.  
147  
CosmoRAM  
CosmoRAM_00_A0 October 5, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
tWC  
tWC  
ADDRESS VALID  
ADDRESS VALID  
ADDRESS  
CE1#  
Low  
WE#  
LB#  
tAS  
tBW  
tBR  
tAS  
tBW  
tBR  
tBWO  
tDH  
tDS  
tDH  
tDS  
DQ1-8  
(Input)  
VALID  
DATA INPUT  
VALID  
DATA INPUT  
tAS  
tBW  
tBR  
tAS  
tBR  
tBWO  
tBW  
UB#  
tDS  
tDH  
tDS  
tDH  
DQ9-16  
(Input)  
VALID  
DATA INPUT  
VALID  
DATA INPUT  
Figure 62. Asynchronous Write Timing #3-4 (WE# / LB# / UB# Byte Write Control)  
Note: This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, ADV#=L and OE#=H.  
tWC  
tRC  
ADDRESS  
CE1#  
WRITE ADDRESS  
READ ADDRESS  
tCHAH  
tAS  
tCW  
tWRC  
tASC  
tCE  
tCHAH  
tCP  
tCP  
WE#  
UB#, LB#  
OE#  
tOHCL  
tCHZ  
tOH  
tDS  
tDH  
tCLZ  
tOH  
DQ  
READ DATA OUTPUT  
WRITE DATA INPUT  
Figure 63. Asynchronous Read / Write Timing #1-1 (CE1# Control)  
Notes:  
1. This timing diagram assumes CE2=H and ADV#=L.  
2. Write address is valid from either CE1# or WE# of last falling edge.  
October 5, 2004 CosmoRAM_00_A0  
CosmoRAM  
148  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
tWC  
tRC  
ADDRESS  
CE1#  
WRITE ADDRESS  
READ ADDRESS  
tCHAH  
tAS  
tWR  
tASC  
tCE  
tCHAH  
tCP  
tCP  
tWP  
WE#  
UB#, LB#  
OE  
tOHCL  
tOE  
tCHZ  
tOH  
tDS  
tDH  
tOLZ  
tOH  
DQ  
READ DATA OUTPUT  
WRITE DATA INPUT  
READ DATA OUTPUT  
Figure 64. Asynchronous Read / Write Timing #1-2 (CE1# / WE# / OE# Control)  
Notes:  
1. This timing diagram assumes CE2=H and ADV#=L.  
2. OE# can be fixed Low during write operation if it is CE1# controlled write at Read-Write-Read Sequence.  
tWC  
tRC  
ADDRESS  
CE1#  
WRITE ADDRESS  
READ ADDRESS  
tOHAH  
tOHAH  
tAA  
Low  
tAS  
tWR  
tWP  
WE#  
tOES  
UB#, LB#  
OE#  
tASO  
tOE  
tOHZ  
tOH  
tOHZ  
tOH  
tDS  
tDH  
tOLZ  
DQ  
READ DATA OUTPUT  
READ DATA OUTPUT  
WRITE DATA INPUT  
Figure 65. Asynchronous Read / Write Timing #2 (OE#, WE# Control)  
Notes:  
1. This timing diagram assumes CE2=H and ADV#=L.  
2. CE1# can be tied to Low for WE# and OE# controlled operation.  
149  
CosmoRAM  
CosmoRAM_00_A0 October 5, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
tWC  
tRC  
ADDRESS  
CE1#  
WRITE ADDRESS  
READ ADDRESS  
tAA  
tOHAH  
tOHAH  
Low  
WE#  
tOES  
tAS  
tBW  
tBR  
tBA  
UB#, LB#  
OE#  
tBHZ  
tASO  
tBHZ  
tOH  
tDS  
tDH  
tBLZ  
tOH  
DQ  
READ DATA OUTPUT  
READ DATA OUTPUT  
WRITE DATA INPUT  
Figure 66. Asynchronous Read / Write Timing #3 (OE,# WE#, LB#, UB# Control)  
Notes:  
1. This timing diagram assumes CE2=H and ADV#=L.  
2. CE1# can be tied to Low for WE# and OE# controlled operation.  
tCK  
CLK  
tCK  
tCKH  
tCKL  
tCKT  
tCKT  
Figure 67. Clock Input Timing  
Notes:  
1. Stable clock input must be required during CE1#=L.  
2.  
t
CK is defined between valid clock edges.  
3.  
t
CKT is defined between VIH Min. and VIL Max  
October 5, 2004 CosmoRAM_00_A0  
CosmoRAM  
150  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Case #1  
Case #2  
CLK  
ADDRESS  
Valid  
Valid  
tASCL  
tCKVH  
tAHV  
tVSCK  
tCKVH  
tAHV  
tASVL  
tVSCK  
ADV#  
CE1#  
tVPL  
tVPL  
tVLCL  
tCLCK  
Low  
Figure 68. Address Latch Timing (Synchronous Mode)  
Notes:  
1. Case #1 is the timing when CE1# is brought to Low after ADV# is brought to Low. Case #2 is the timing when ADV# is  
brought to Low after CE1# is brought to Low.  
2.  
t
VPL is specified from the negative edge of either CE1# or ADV# whichever comes late. At least one valid clock edge must be  
input during ADV#=L.  
3. tVSCK and tCLCK are applied to the 1st valid clock edge during ADV#=L.  
151  
CosmoRAM  
CosmoRAM_00_A0 October 5, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
RL=5  
CLK  
tRCB  
ADDRESS  
Valid  
Valid  
tASVL  
tAHV  
tCKVH  
tASVL  
tVSCK  
tVSCK  
tCKVH  
ADV#  
CE1#  
tVPL  
tVHVL  
tVPL  
tASCL  
tASCL  
tCLCK  
tCLCK  
tCKOH  
tCP  
OE#  
WE#  
tOLQ  
High  
tCKBH  
tBLQ  
LB#, UB#  
WAIT#  
DQ  
tOHTZ  
tCKTV  
tCKTV  
High-Z  
High-Z  
tOHZ  
tOLTL  
tCKTX  
tAC  
tAC  
tAC  
tCKTX  
QBL  
Q1  
tOLZ  
tCKQX  
tCKQX  
Figure 69. 32M Synchronous Read Timing #1 (OE# Control)  
Note: This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, the valid clock edge on rising edge and BL=8 or 16.  
October 5, 2004 CosmoRAM_00_A0  
CosmoRAM  
152  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
RL=5  
CLK  
tRCB  
ADDRESS  
Valid  
Valid  
tASVL  
tAHV  
tCKVH  
tASVL  
tAHV  
tCKVH  
tVSCK  
tVSCK  
ADV#  
tVPL  
tVHVL  
tVPL  
tASCL  
tASCL  
CE1#  
tCP  
tCLCK  
tCKCLH  
tCLCK  
OE#  
WE#  
High  
tCKBH  
LB#, UB#  
WAIT#  
DQ  
tCKTV  
tCKTV  
tCHTZ  
tCLTL  
tCLZ  
tCLTL  
tCKTX  
tAC  
tAC  
tAC  
tCKTX  
tCHZ  
Q1  
QBL  
tCLZ  
tCKQX  
tCKQX  
Figure 70. 32M Synchronous Read Timing #2 (CE1# Control)  
Note: This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, the valid clock edge on rising edge and BL=8 or 16.  
153  
CosmoRAM  
CosmoRAM_00_A0 October 5, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
RL=5  
CLK  
tRCB  
ADDRESS  
Valid  
Valid  
tASVL  
tAHV  
tASVL  
tAHV  
tCKVH  
tVSCK  
tVSCK  
tCKVH  
ADV#  
tVPL  
tVHVL  
tVPL  
CE1#  
Low  
OE#  
WE#  
Low  
High  
LB#, UB#  
WAIT#  
DQ  
tCKTV  
tCKTV  
tCKTX  
tAC  
tAC  
tAC  
tCKTX  
QBL  
Q1  
tCKQX  
tCKQX  
Figure 71. 32M Synchronous Read Timing #3 (ADV# Control)  
Note: This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, the valid clock edge on rising edge and BL=8 or 16.  
October 5, 2004 CosmoRAM_00_A0  
CosmoRAM  
154  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
RL=5  
CLK  
ADDRESS  
XXX7Fh  
tASVL  
tAHV  
tCKVH  
tVSCK  
ADV#  
CE1#  
OE#  
tVPL  
tASCL  
tCLCK  
tOLQ  
High  
WE#  
tBLQ  
LB#, UB#  
WAIT#  
DQ  
tCKTV  
tCKTV  
tCKTV  
High-Z  
High-Z  
tCKTX  
tOLTL  
tCKTX  
tAC  
tAC  
tCKTX  
tAC  
tAC  
tAC  
Q1  
Q2  
Q3  
tOLZ  
tCKQX  
tCKQX  
tCKQX  
Figure 72. Synchronous Read - WAIT# Output Timing (Continuous Read)  
Note: This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, the valid clock edge on rising edge and BL=8 or 16.  
155  
CosmoRAM  
CosmoRAM_00_A0 October 5, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
RL=5  
CLK  
tRCB  
ADDRESS  
Valid  
Valid  
tASVL  
tAHV  
tCKVH  
tASVL  
tVSCK  
tVSCK  
tCKVH  
ADV#  
CE1#  
tVPL  
tVHVL  
tVPL  
tASCL  
tASCL  
tCLCK  
tCLCK  
tCKOH  
tCP  
OE#  
WE#  
tOLQ  
High  
tCKBH  
tBLQ  
LB#, UB#  
tCKTV  
tOHTZ  
tOHZ  
WAIT#  
DQ  
High-Z  
High-Z  
tOLTL  
tCKTX  
tAC  
tAC  
tAC  
Q1  
QBL  
tOLZ  
tCKQX  
tCKQX  
Figure 73. 64M Synchronous Read Timing #1 (OE# Control)  
Note: This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, the valid clock edge on rising edge and BL=8 or 16.  
October 5, 2004 CosmoRAM_00_A0  
CosmoRAM  
156  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
RL=5  
CLK  
tRCB  
ADDRESS  
Valid  
Valid  
tASVL  
tAHV  
tCKVH  
tASVL  
tAHV  
tCKVH  
tVSCK  
tVSCK  
ADV#  
CE1#  
tVPL  
tVHVL  
tVPL  
tASCL  
tASCL  
tCP  
tCLCK  
tCKCLH  
tCLCK  
OE#  
WE#  
High  
tCKBH  
LB#, UB#  
tCKTV  
tCHTZ  
tCLTL  
WAIT#  
DQ  
tCLZ  
tCLTL  
tCKTX  
tAC  
tAC  
tAC  
tCHZ  
Q1  
QBL  
tCLZ  
tCKQX  
tCKQX  
Figure 74. 64M Synchronous Read Timing #2 (CE1# Control)  
Note: This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, the valid clock edge on rising edge and BL=8 or 16.  
157  
CosmoRAM  
CosmoRAM_00_A0 October 5, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
RL=5  
CLK  
tRCB  
ADDRESS  
Valid  
Valid  
tASVL  
tAHV  
tCKVH  
tASVL  
tAHV  
tCKVH  
tVSCK  
tVSCK  
ADV#  
tVPL  
tVHVL  
tVPL  
CE1#  
Low  
OE#  
WE#  
Low  
High  
LB#, UB#  
WAIT#  
DQ  
tCKTV  
tVLTL  
tVLTL  
tCKTX  
tAC  
tAC  
tAC  
Q1  
QBL  
tCKQX  
tCKQX  
Figure 75. 64M Synchronous Read Timing #3 (ADV# Control)  
Note: This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, the valid clock edge on rising edge and BL=8 or 16.  
October 5, 2004 CosmoRAM_00_A0  
CosmoRAM  
158  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
RL=5  
CLK  
tWCB  
ADDRESS  
Valid  
Valid  
tASVL  
tAHV  
tCKVH  
tASVL  
tAHV  
tCKVH  
tVSCK  
tVSCK  
tVHVL  
tWRB  
ADV#  
CE1#  
tVPL  
tVPL  
tCLCK  
tASCL  
tASCL  
tCLCK  
tCP  
High  
OE#  
WE#  
tWLD  
tCKWH  
tBS  
tCKBH  
tBS  
LB#, UB#  
WAIT#  
DQ  
High-Z  
tWLTH  
tDSCK  
tDSCK  
tDSCK  
tWHTZ  
D1  
D2  
DBL  
tDHCK  
tDHCK  
Figure 76. Synchronous Write Timing #1 (WE# Level Control)  
Note: This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, the valid clock edge on rising edge and BL=8 or 16.  
159  
CosmoRAM  
CosmoRAM_00_A0 October 5, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
RL=5  
CLK  
tWCB  
ADDRESS  
Valid  
Valid  
tASVL  
tAHV  
tCKVH  
tASVL  
tAHV  
tCKVH  
tVSCK  
tVSCK  
tVHVL  
tWRB  
ADV#  
CE1#  
tVPL  
tVPL  
tCLCK  
tASCL  
tASCL  
tCLCK  
tCP  
tCKCLH  
High  
OE#  
WE#  
tWSCK  
tCKWH  
tWSCK  
tCKWH  
tBS  
tCKBH  
tBS  
LB#, UB#  
WAIT#  
High-Z  
tWLTH  
tDSCK  
tDSCK  
tDSCK  
tCHTZ  
tWLTH  
D1  
D2  
DBL  
DQ  
tDHCK  
tDHCK  
Figure 77. Synchronous Write Timing #2 (WE# Single Clock Pulse Control)  
Note: This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, the valid clock edge on rising edge and BL=8 or 16.  
October 5, 2004 CosmoRAM_00_A0  
CosmoRAM  
160  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
RL=5  
CLK  
tWCB  
ADDRESS  
Valid  
Valid  
tASVL  
tAHV  
tCKVH  
tASVL  
tAHV  
tCKVH  
tVSCK  
tVSCK  
ADV#  
CE1#  
tVHVL  
tVPL  
tVPL  
tWRB  
High  
OE#  
WE#  
tBS  
tCKBH  
tBS  
LB#, UB#  
WAIT#  
DQ  
High  
tDSCK  
tDSCK  
tDSCK  
D1  
D2  
DBL  
tDHCK  
tDHCK  
Figure 78. Synchronous Write Timing #3 (ADV# Control)  
Note: This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, the valid clock edge on rising edge and BL=8 or 16.  
161  
CosmoRAM  
CosmoRAM_00_A0 October 5, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
RL=5  
CLK  
tWCB  
ADDRESS  
Valid  
Valid  
tASVL  
tAHV  
tCKVH  
tASVL  
tAHV  
tCKVH  
tVSCK  
tVSCK  
tVHVL  
tWRB  
ADV#  
CE1#  
tVPL  
tVPL  
tCLCK  
tASCL  
tASCL  
tCLCK  
tCP  
High  
OE#  
WE#  
tWLD  
tCKWH  
tBS  
tCKBH  
tBS  
LB#, UB#  
WAIT#  
DQ  
High-Z  
tWLTH  
tDSCK  
tWHTZ  
tWLTH  
D1  
tDHCK  
Figure 79. Synchronous Write Timing #4 (WE# Level Control, Single Write)  
Notes:  
1. This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, the valid clock edge on rising edge and single write operation.  
2. Write data is latched on the valid clock edge.  
October 5, 2004 CosmoRAM_00_A0  
CosmoRAM  
162  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
RL=5  
CLK  
tWCB  
ADDRESS  
Valid  
tASVL  
tVHVL  
tAHV  
tCKVH  
tVSCK  
ADV#  
CE1#  
tVPL  
tCLCK  
tCKCLH  
tCKCLH  
tASCL  
tCP  
OE#  
WE#  
LB#, UB#  
WAIT#  
DQ  
tCKBH  
tBS  
tCKBH  
tCHTZ  
tCKTV  
tCHZ  
tCLTH  
tAC  
tCKTX  
QBL  
tDSCK  
tDSCK  
tDSCK  
tDSCK  
QBL-1  
D1  
D2  
D3  
DBL  
tDHCK  
tDHCK  
tDHCK  
tDHCK  
tCKQX  
tCKQX  
Figure 80. 32M Synchronous Read to Write Timing #1(CE1# Control)  
Note: This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, the valid clock edge on rising edge and BL=8 or 16.  
163  
CosmoRAM  
CosmoRAM_00_A0 October 5, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
RL=5  
CLK  
ADDRESS  
Valid  
tASVL  
tAHV  
tVSCK  
tCKVH  
ADV#  
CE1#  
tVPL  
tVHVL  
tCKOH  
OE#  
tWLD  
tCKWH  
WE#  
tCKBH  
tBS  
tCKBH  
LB#, UB#  
tOHTZ  
tCKTV  
WAIT#  
DQ  
tOHZ  
tAC  
tCKTX  
tWLTH  
tDSCK  
tDSCK  
tDSCK  
tDSCK  
QBL-1  
QBL  
D1  
D2  
D3  
DBL  
tDHCK  
tDHCK  
tDHCK  
tDHCK  
tCKQX  
tCKQX  
Figure 81. 32M Synchronous Read to Write Timing #2(ADV# Control)  
Note: This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, the valid clock edge on rising edge and BL=8 or 16.  
October 5, 2004 CosmoRAM_00_A0  
CosmoRAM  
164  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
RL=5  
CLK  
tWCB  
ADDRESS  
Valid  
tASVL  
tAHV  
tCKVH  
tVSCK  
ADV#  
tVHVL  
tASCL  
tVPL  
tCLCK  
tCKCLH  
tCKCLH  
CE1#  
tCP  
OE#  
WE#  
tCKBH  
tBS  
tCKBH  
LB#, UB#  
WAIT#  
DQ  
tCHTZ  
tCHZ  
tAC  
tCLTH  
tDSCK  
tDSCK  
tDSCK  
tDSCK  
QBL-1  
QBL  
D1  
D2  
D3  
DBL  
tDHCK  
tDHCK  
tDHCK  
tDHCK  
tCKQX  
tCKQX  
Figure 82. 64M Synchronous Read to Write Timing #1(CE1# Control)  
Note: This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, the valid clock edge on rising edge and BL=8 or 16.  
165  
CosmoRAM  
CosmoRAM_00_A0 October 5, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
RL=5  
CLK  
ADDRESS  
Valid  
tASVL  
tAHV  
tVSCK  
tCKVH  
ADV#  
tVPL  
tVHVL  
CE1#  
tCKOH  
OE#  
WE#  
tWLD  
tCKWH  
tCKBH  
tBS  
tCKBH  
LB#, UB#  
WAIT#  
DQ  
tOHTZ  
tOHZ  
tAC  
tWLTH  
tDSCK  
tDSCK  
tDSCK  
tDSCK  
QBL-1  
QBL  
D1  
D2  
D3  
DBL  
tDHCK  
tDHCK  
tDHCK  
tDHCK  
tCKQX  
tCKQX  
Figure 83. 64M Synchronous Read to Write Timing #2(ADV# Control)  
Note: This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, the valid clock edge on rising edge and BL=8 or 16.  
October 5, 2004 CosmoRAM_00_A0  
CosmoRAM  
166  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
RL=5  
CLK  
tCKT  
ADDRESS  
Valid  
tASVL  
tAHV  
tVSCK  
tCKVH  
ADV#  
CE1#  
tVPL  
tASCL  
tCKCLH  
tCP  
tCLCK  
tWRB  
OE#  
WE#  
tCKBH  
LB#, UB#  
tCKTV  
High-Z  
WAIT#  
tDSCK  
tDSCK  
tCHTZ  
tCLTL  
tCKTX  
tAC  
tAC  
DBL-1  
DBL  
Q1  
Q2  
DQ  
tDHCK  
tDHCK  
tCLZ  
tCKQX  
tCKQX  
Figure 84. Synchronous Write to Read Timing #1 (CE1# Control)  
Note: This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, the valid clock edge on rising edge and BL=8 or 16.  
167  
CosmoRAM  
CosmoRAM_00_A0 October 5, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
RL=5  
CLK  
tCKT  
ADDRESS  
Valid  
tASVL  
tVSCK  
tAHV  
tCKVH  
ADV#  
CE1#  
tVPL  
tWRB  
Low  
OE#  
WE#  
tOLQ  
tCKWH  
tCKBH  
tBLQ  
LB#, UB#  
WAIT#  
tCKTV  
High-Z  
tDSCK  
tDSCK  
tWHTZ  
tOLTL  
tCKTX  
tAC  
tAC  
DBL-1  
DBL  
Q1  
Q2  
DQ  
tDHCK  
tDHCK  
tOLZ  
tCKQX  
tCKQX  
Figure 85. Synchronous Write to Read Timing #2 (ADV# Control)  
Note: This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, the valid clock edge on rising edge and BL=8 or 16.  
October 5, 2004 CosmoRAM_00_A0  
CosmoRAM  
168  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
CE1#  
CE2  
tCHS  
tC2LH  
tCHH  
V
DD  
VDD min  
0V  
Figure 86. Power-up Timing #1  
Note: The tC2LH specifies after VDD reaches specified minimum level.  
CE1#  
tCHH  
CE2  
VDD  
VDD min  
0V  
Figure 87. Power-up Timing #2  
Note: The tCHH specifies after VDD reaches specified minimum level and applicable to both CE1# and CE2.  
CE1#  
tCHS  
CE2  
tCSP  
tC2LP  
tCHH (tCHHP)  
High-Z  
DQ  
Power Down Entry  
Power Down Mode  
Power Down Exit  
Figure 88. Power Down Entry and Exit Timing  
Note: This Power Down mode can be also used as a reset timing if the POWER-UP timing above could not be satisfied  
and Power-Down program was not performed prior to this reset.  
169  
CosmoRAM  
CosmoRAM_00_A0 October 5, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
CE1#  
OE#  
tCHOX  
tCHWX  
WE#  
Active (Read)  
Standby  
Active (Write)  
Standby  
Figure 89. Standby Entry Timing after Read or Write  
Note: Both tCHOX and tCHWX define the earliest entry timing for Standby mode. If either of timing is not satisfied, it takes  
tRC (min) period for Standby mode from CE1# Low to High transition.  
tRC  
tWC  
tWC  
tWC  
tWC  
tRC  
MSB*1  
MSB*1  
MSB*1  
MSB*1  
MSB*1  
Key*2  
ADDRESS  
CE1#  
tCP*3  
(tRC)  
tCP  
tCP  
tCP  
tCP  
tCP  
OE#  
WE#  
LB#, UB#  
DQ*3  
RDa  
Cycle #1  
RDa  
Cycle #2  
RDa  
Cycle #3  
X
X
RDb  
Cycle #6  
Cycle #4  
Cycle #5  
Figure 90. Configuration Register Set Timing #1 (Asynchronous Operation)  
Notes:  
1. The all address inputs must be High from Cycle #1 to #5.  
2. The address key must confirm the format specified in the "Functional Description" section. If not, the operation and data are  
not guaranteed.  
3. After tCP or tRC following Cycle #6, the Configuration Register Set is completed and returned to the normal operation. tCP and  
t
RC are applicable to returning to asynchronous mode and to synchronous mode respectively.  
4. Byte read or write is available in addition to Word read or write. At least one byte control signal (LB# or UB#) need to be  
Low.  
October 5, 2004 CosmoRAM_00_A0  
CosmoRAM  
170  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
CLK  
ADDRESS  
MSB  
MSB  
MSB  
MSB  
MSB  
Key  
tRCB  
tWCB  
tWCB  
tWCB  
tWCB  
tRCB  
ADV#  
CE1#  
tTRB  
tTRB  
tTRB  
tTRB  
tTRB  
tTRB  
OE#  
WE#  
LB#, UB#  
WAIT#  
RL  
RL-1  
RDa  
Cycle#2  
RL-1  
RDa  
Cycle#3  
RL-1  
RL-1  
RL  
RDa  
X
X
RDb  
Cycle#6  
DQ  
Cycle#1  
Cycle#4  
Cycle#5  
Figure 91. Configuration Register Set Timing #2 (Synchronous Operation)  
Notes:  
1. The all address inputs must be High from Cycle #1 to #5.  
2. The address key must confirm the format specified in the "Functional Description" section. If not, the operation and data are  
not guaranteed.  
3. After tTRB following Cycle #6, the Configuration Register Set is completed and returned to the normal operation.  
4. Byte read or write is available in addition to Word read or write. At least one byte control signal (LB# or UB#) need to be  
Low.  
171  
CosmoRAM  
CosmoRAM_00_A0 October 5, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Revision Summary  
Revision A (October 27, 2004)  
Initial release.  
Colophon  
The products described in this document are designed, developed and manufactured as contemplated for general use, including without limitation, ordinary  
industrial use, general office use, personal use, and household use, but are not designed, developed and manufactured as contemplated (1) for any use that  
includes fatal risks or dangers that, unless extremely high safety is secured, could have a serious effect to the public, and could lead directly to death, personal  
injury, severe physical damage or other loss (i.e., nuclear reaction control in nuclear facility, aircraft flight control, air traffic control, mass transport control,  
medical life support system, missile launch control in weapon system), or (2) for any use where chance of failure is intolerable (i.e., submersible repeater and  
artificial satellite). Please note that Spansion will not be liable to you and/or any third party for any claims or damages arising in connection with above-men-  
tioned uses of the products. Any semiconductor devices have an inherent chance of failure. You must protect against injury, damage or loss from such failures  
by incorporating safety design measures into your facility and equipment such as redundancy, fire protection, and prevention of over-current levels and other  
abnormal operating conditions. If any products described in this document represent goods or technologies subject to certain restrictions on export under  
the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Law of Japan, the US Export Administration Regulations or the applicable laws of any other country, the prior au-  
thorization by the respective government entity will be required for export of those products.  
Trademarks and Notice  
The contents of this document are subject to change without notice. This document may contain information on a Spansion product under development by  
Spansion LLC. Spansion LLC reserves the right to change or discontinue work on any product without notice. The information in this document is provided  
ìas isî without warranty or guarantee of any kind as to its accuracy, completeness, operability, fitness for particular purpose, merchantability, non-infringement  
of third-party rights, or any other warranty, express, implied, or statutory. Spansion LLC assumes no liability for any damages of any kind arising out of the  
use of the information in this document.  
Copyright © 2004 Spansion LLC. All rights reserved. Spansion, the Spansion logo, MirrorBit, combinations thereof, and ExpressFlash are trademarks of Span-  
sion LLC. Other company and product names used in this publication are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of their respective compa-  
nies.  
October 27, 2004 S71WS256/128/064J_CSA0  
Revision Summary  
172  

相关型号:

CYPRESS

S71WS128JB0BAW2Y0

Stacked Multi-Chip Product (MCP)
SPANSION

S71WS128JB0BAW2Y2

Stacked Multi-Chip Product (MCP)
SPANSION

S71WS128JB0BAW2Y3

Stacked Multi-Chip Product (MCP)
SPANSION
SPANSION

S71WS128JB0BAWAY0

Stacked Multi-Chip Product (MCP)
SPANSION

S71WS128JB0BAWAY2

Stacked Multi-Chip Product (MCP)
SPANSION

S71WS128JB0BAWAY3

Stacked Multi-Chip Product (MCP)
SPANSION

S71WS128JB0BAWTY0

Stacked Multi-Chip Product (MCP)
SPANSION

S71WS128JB0BAWTY2

Stacked Multi-Chip Product (MCP)
SPANSION

S71WS128JB0BAWTY3

Stacked Multi-Chip Product (MCP)
SPANSION

S71WS128JB0BFIAA0

Memory Circuit, 8MX16, CMOS, PBGA84, 8 X 11.60 MM, 1.20 MM HEIGHT, LEAD FREE, FBGA-84
SPANSION